2007 Nissan Maxima

Welcome to the growing family of new NISSANowners. This vehicle is delivered to you withconfidence. It was produced using the latesttechniques and strict quality control.

This manual was prepared to help you under-stand the operation and maintenance of yourvehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through thismanual before operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Bookletexplains details about the warranties cov-ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Serviceand Maintenance Guide” explains detailsabout maintaining and servicing your ve-hicle. Additionally, a separate CustomerCare/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) willexplain how to resolve any concerns youmay have with your vehicle, as well asclarify your rights under your state’s lemonlaw.

Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehiclebest. When you require any service or have anyquestions, they will be glad to assist you with theextensive resources available to them.

Before driving your vehicle please read this Own-er’s Manual carefully. This will ensure familiaritywith controls and maintenance requirements, as-sisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-MINDERS FOR SAFETY!

Follow these important driving rules tohelp ensure a safe and complete trip foryou and your passengers!

● NEVER drive under the influence of al-cohol or drugs.

● ALWAYS observe posted speed limitsand never drive too fast for conditions.

● ALWAYS give your full attention to driv-ing and avoid using vehicle features ortaking other actions that could distractyou.

● ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-priate child restraint systems. Preteenchildren should be seated in the rearseat.

● ALWAYS provide information about theproper use of vehicle safety features toall occupants of the vehicle.

● ALWAYS review this owner’s manual forimportant safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.Modification could affect itsperformance, safety or durability, andmay even violate governmentalregulations. In addition, damage or per-formance problems resulting frommodifications may not be covered underNISSAN warranties.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)04/06/06—root X

This manual includes information for all optionsavailable on this model. Therefore, you may findsome information that does not apply to yourvehicle.

All information, specifications and illustrations inthis manual are those in effect at the time ofprinting. NISSAN reserves the right to changespecifications or design without notice and with-out obligation.

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUTTHIS MANUALYou will see various symbols in this manual. Theyare used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause death or seriouspersonal injury. To avoid or reduce therisk, the procedures must be followedprecisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of ahazard that could cause minor or moder-ate personal injury or damage to your ve-hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-cedures must be followed carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-tion, it means the arrow points to the front of thevehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to theseindicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to thesecall attention to an item in the illustration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65WARNING

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,and certain vehicle components containor emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth de-fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component wearcontain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or other reproductive harm.

BLUETOOTHt is atrademark owned byBluetooth SIG, Inc.,U.S.A. and licensed toXanavi InformaticsCorporation.

© 2006 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.

All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’sManual may be reproduced or stored in a retrievalsystem, or transmitted in any form, or by anymeans, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,recording or otherwise, without the prior writtenpermission of Nissan North America, Inc.

APD1005

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)04/06/06—debbie X

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer areour primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.

However, if there is something that your NISSANdealer cannot assist you with or you would like toprovide NISSAN directly with comments orquestions, please contact the NISSAN Con-sumer Affairs Department using our toll-freenumber:

For U.S. customers1-800-NISSAN-1(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for thefollowing information:

– Your name, address, and telephone number

– Vehicle identification number (attached to thetop of the instrument panel on the driver’sside)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

OR

You can write to NISSAN with the information at:

For U.S. customersNissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, California 90248-0191

For Canadian customersNissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CAREPROGRAM


Table ofContents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Technical and consumer information

Index

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

0 Illustrated table of contents

Airbags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-2Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3Exterior rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8Warning/indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9

Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)04/17/06—arosenma X

1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-21)2. Rear head restraint (P. 1-8)3. Rear seat belts (P. 1-10)4. Supplemental curtain side-impact air

bag (P. 1-37)5. Supplemental side impact air bags

(P. 1-37)6. Front head restraint (P. 1-8, P. 1-9)7. Front seat belts (P. 1-10)8. Supplemental front impact air bags

(P. 1-37)9. Seats (P. 1-2)10. Occupant classification sensor

(pressure sensor) (P.1-45)11. Seat belt pretensioners (P. 1-51)12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) (P. 1-20)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0065

AIRBAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILDRESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents


1. Engine hood (P. 3-20)2. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-22)3. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)4. Windshield wiper and washer switch

(P. 2-20)5. Windshield (P. 8-19)6. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-40)7. Power windows (P. 2-38)8. Door locks, Intelligent key system, keys,

request button (P. 3-4, 3-7, 3-2, 3-7)9. Mirrors (P. 3-27)10. Tire pressure (P. 8-32)11. Flat tire (P. 6-2)12. Tire chains (P. 8-40)13. Cornering light (P. 2-26)14. Fog light switch (P. 2-26)15. Tie down hooks (P. 6-12)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0086

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3


1. Rear window defroster switch (P. 2-21)2. Rear sun shade (if so equipped)

(P. 2-42)3. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-22)4. Trunk lid (P. 3-20)5. Vehicle loading (P. 9-12)6. Tie-down hook (P. 6-12)7. Exterior trunk lid release/request button

(P. 3-12)8. Rear sonar system (P. 5-22)9. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-29)10. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation

(P. 3-23, P. 9-3)11. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-22)12. Child safety locks (P. 3-6)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

WII0087

EXTERIOR REAR



1. Glove box (P. 2-35)2. Automatic anti-glare inside mirror

(P. 3-27)3. Sun visors (P. 3-26)4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-43)5. Front seat (P. 1-2)6. Sunroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-40)7. Rear console (P. 2-36)8. Rear seat (P. 1-6)9. Rear cup holders (P. 2-33)10. Front console (P. 2-35)11. Front cup holders (P. 2-33)12. Park brake, parking on hills

(P. 5-13, P. 5-17)13. HomeLinkT (P. 2-46)See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.

LII0069

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT



1. Side and center ventilators (P. 4-18)2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-22)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

and BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-42, 4-44)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-37, P. 2-27)6. Security indicator light (P. 2-17)7. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-14)

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch(P. 2-20)

9. Display screen/Navigation system*(P. 4-2, P. 4-6)

10. Display screen/Navigation system*controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-6)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag(P. 1-37)

12. Glove box (P. 2-35)13. Audio system controls (P. 4-22)14. Climate controls (P. 4-19)15. Storage (P. 2-32)16. Power outlet (P. 2-31)17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-9)18. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-27)19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-47)20. Ignition switch (P. 5-6)21. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-24)22. Traction control system (TCS) off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-29) orVehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)

23. Rear sonar system off switch(if so equipped) (P. 2-30)

24. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-28)25. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-25)

LIC0988

INSTRUMENT PANEL



*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).

See the page number indicated in paren-theses for operating details.



1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-11)2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-8)3. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)4. Air cleaner (P. 8-16)5. Battery (P. 8-13)6. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-21)7. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-8)8. Radiator cap (P. 8-7)9. Drive belt location (P.8-14)10. Fuse block (P. 8-21)11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-12)12. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-7)

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.


WDI0525

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



Warninglight

Name Page

or

Anti-lock brakingwarning light

2-11

or

Brake warning light 2-11

Charge warninglight

2-11

Door open warninglight

2-11

Engine oil pressurewarning light

2-11

Intelligent Key sys-tem warning light

2-12

Low fuel warninglight

2-12

Warninglight

Name Page

Low tire pressurewarning light

2-12

Low windshieldwasher fluid warninglight

2-13

P position selectingwarning light

2-13

Seat belt warninglight and chime

2-13

Supplemental airbag warning light

2-14

Trunk lid open warn-ing light

2-14

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Continuously Vari-able Transmission(CVT) indicator light

2-14

Indicatorlight

Name Page

Continuously Vari-able Transmission(CVT) position indi-cator light

2-14

CRUISE mainswitch indicator light

2-14

Cruise SET switchindicator light

2-14

Front passenger airbag status light

2-15

High beam indicatorlight (blue)

2-15

Malfunction indica-tor light (MIL)

2-15

Slip indicator light (ifso equipped)

2-16

Traction control sys-tem off indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-16

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS



Indicatorlight

Name Page

Turn signal/hazardindicator lights

2-16

Vehicle dynamiccontrol off indicatorlight (if so equipped)

2-16



1 Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front manual seat adjustment —passenger’s side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Front power seat adjustment (for driver’sseat and if so equipped for passenger’sseat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4Folding rear seat (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Head restraint adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8Active head restraint (front seats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Precautions on seat belt usage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21Child Restraint Installation Using LATCH . . . . . . . . . 1-22Child Restraint Installation Using The SeatBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26

Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33

Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33Booster seat installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35

Supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53


WARNING

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat properly. See “Precau-tions on Seat Belt Usage” later in thissection.

● After adjustment, gently rock in the seatto make sure it is securely locked.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls. Unattendedchildren could become involved in seri-ous accidents.

FRONT MANUAL SEATADJUSTMENT — PASSENGER’SSIDE

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system


Forward and backwardPull the lever up and hold it while you slide theseat forward or backward to the desired position.Release the lever to lock the seat in position.

RecliningTo recline the seatback, pull the lever up and leanback. To bring the seatback forward, pull the leverup and lean your body forward. Release the leverto lock the seatback in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section. Also, the seatback can be reclinedto allow occupants to rest when the vehicle isstopped.

LRS0244 LRS0245

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3


FRONT POWER SEATADJUSTMENT (for driver’s seat and ifso equipped for passenger’s seat)

Operating tips

● The power seat motor has an auto-resetoverload protection circuit. If the motorstops during operation, wait 30 seconds,then reactivate the switch.

● Do not operate the power seat switch for along period of time when the engine is off.This will discharge the battery.

See “Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped)”in “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” for auto-matic drive positioner operation.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch forward or backward will slidethe seat forward or backward to the desiredposition.

Reclining

Move the recline switch backward until the de-sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatbackforward again, move the switch forward andmove your body forward. The seatback will moveforward.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of theseatback for occupants of different sizes foradded comfort and to help obtain proper seatbelt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” laterin this section). Also, the seatback can be re-clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-hicle is stopped.

WRS0163



Seat lifter (driver’s seat)Push the front or rear end of the switch up ordown to adjust the angle and height of the seatcushion.

Lumbar support (driver’s seat)The lumbar support feature provides lower backsupport to the driver. Move the lever up or down(manual) or move the switch forward or backward(power) to adjust the seat lumbar area.

WRS0164

ManualLRS0239

PowerLRS0238



FOLDING REAR SEAT (if soequipped)

Interior trunk access

For models without rear center console, the trunkcan be accessed from the passenger side of therear seat for loading and unloading, as shown.

s1 Push down on the button on the rear parcelshelf.

s2 Fold down the passenger side seatback.

WARNING

● Never allow anyone to ride in the cargoarea or on the rear seat when it is in thefold-down position. Use of these areasby passengers without proper restraintscould result in serious injury in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● The 4-passenger model has seating andseat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the frontseats and 2 in the rear seats. Never usethe rear console as a seating position orfor a child restraint.

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. Do not place cargo higher thanthe seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-lision, unsecured cargo could causepersonal injury.

● When returning the seatbacks to theupright position, be certain they arecompletely secured in the latched posi-tion. If they are not completely secured,passengers may be injured in an acci-dent or sudden stop.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

LRS0246



To fold down the driver side of the rear seat, reachthrough the opening and pull on the strap s1located behind the seat.

The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-cal key to prevent unauthorized access.

For models with rear center console, the trunkcan be accessed through the access panel be-tween the rear seats.

The panel can be locked using the mechanicalkey to prevent unauthorized access. For moreinformation on keys, refer to ”Keys” in the Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section of thismanual.

Center armrestPull the armrest forward until it is horizontal.

LRS0247 LIC0431 LIC0401



HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENTTo raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower,push and hold the lock knob and push the headrestraint down.

WARNING

Head restraints should be adjusted prop-erly as they may provide significant pro-tection against injury in an accident. Donot remove them. Check the adjustmentafter someone else uses the seat.

Adjust the head restraint so the center is levelwith the center of your ears.

Type A — Front

WRS0133

Type B — RearLRS0240 WRS0134



ACTIVE HEAD RESTRAINT (frontseats)

WARNING

● Always adjust the head restraints prop-erly as specified in the previous section.Failure to do so can reduce the effec-tiveness of the active head restraint.

● Active head restraints are designed tosupplement other safety systems. Al-ways wear seat belts. No system canprevent all injuries in any accident.

● Do not attach anything to the head re-straint stalks. Doing so could impairactive head restraint function.

The head restraint moves forward utilizing theforce that the seatback receives from the occu-pant in a rear-end collision. The movement of thehead restraint helps support the occupant’s headby reducing its backward movement and helpingabsorb some of the forces that may lead to whip-lash type injuries.

Active head restraints are effective for collisionsat low to medium speeds in which it is said thatwhiplash injury occurs most.

Active head restraints operate only in certainrear-end collisions. After the collision, the headrestraints return to their original positions.

Properly adjust the active head restraints as de-scribed earlier in this section.

SPA1025



PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELTUSAGEIf you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-justed and you are sitting upright and well back inyour seat with both feet on the floor, your chancesof being injured or killed in an accident and/or theseverity of injury may be greatly reduced.NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of yourpassengers to buckle up every time you drive,even if your seating position includes a supple-mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provincesor territories specify that seat belts be wornat all times when a vehicle is being driven.

SSS0136

SEAT BELTS



WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes. Children should be properly re-strained in the rear seat and, if appro-priate, in a child restraint.

WARNING

● The seat belt should be properly ad-justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so mayreduce the effectiveness of the entirerestraint system and increase thechance or severity of injury in an acci-dent. Serious injury or death can occurif the seat belt is not worn properly.

SSS0134 SSS0016



WARNING

● Always route the shoulder belt overyour shoulder and across your chest.Never run the belt behind your back,under your arm or across your neck. Thebelt should be away from your face andneck, but not falling off your shoulder.

● Position the lap belt as low and snug aspossible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THEWAIST. A lap belt worn too high couldincrease the risk of internal injuries inan accident.

● Be sure the seat belt tongue is securelyfastened to the proper buckle.

● Do not wear the seat belt inside out ortwisted. Doing so may reduce itseffectiveness.

● Do not allow more than one person touse the same seat belt.

● Never carry more people in the vehiclethan there are seat belts.

● The 4-passenger model has seating andseat belts for 4 occupants, 2 in the frontseats and 2 in the rear seats.

● If the seat belt warning light glows con-tinuously while the ignition is turnedON with all doors closed and all seatbelts fastened, it may indicate a mal-function in the system. Have the systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

● Once the pre-tensioner seat belt hasactivated, it cannot be reused and mustbe replaced together with the retractor.See your NISSAN dealer.

● Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system componentsshould be done by a NISSAN dealer.

● All seat belt assemblies, including re-tractors and attaching hardware,should be inspected after any collisionby a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-mends that all seat belt assemblies inuse during a collision be replaced un-less the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue tooperate properly. Seat belt assembliesnot in use during a collision should alsobe inspected and replaced if eitherdamage or improper operation is noted.

● All child restraints and attaching hard-ware should be inspected after any col-lision. Always follow the restraintmanufacturer’s inspection instructionsand replacement recommendations.The child restraints should be replacedif they are damaged.

CHILD SAFETY

Children need adults to help protect them.They need to be properly restrained.

In addition to the general information in thismanual, child safety information is available frommany other sources, including doctors, teachers,government traffic safety offices, and communityorganizations. Every child is different, so be sureto learn the best way to transport your child.

SSS0014



There are three basic types of child restraintsystems:

● Rear facing child restraint

● Front facing child restraint

● Booster seat

The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.Generally, infants up to about 1 year and lessthan 20 pounds (9 kg) should be placed in rearfacing child restraints. Front facing child re-straints are available for children who outgrowrear facing child restraints and are at least 1 yearold. Booster seats are used to help position avehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can nolonger use a front facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special protec-tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fitthem properly. The shoulder belt maycome too close to the face or neck. Thelap belt may not fit over their small hipbones. In an accident, an improperly fit-ting seat belt could cause serious or fatalinjury. Always use appropriate childrestraints.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-tories require the use of approved child restraints

for infants and small children. See “Child Re-straints” later in this section.

Also, there are other types of child restraintsavailable for larger children for additional protec-tion.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teensand children be restrained in the rear seat.According to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained in therear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because yourvehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-tem (Air bag system) for the front passen-ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”later in this section.

InfantsInfants up to at least 1 year old should be placedin a rear facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-mends that infants be placed in child restraintsthat comply with Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. You should choose a child restraintthat fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-facturer’s instructions for installation and use.

Small ChildrenChildren that are over one year old and weighbetween 20 lbs (9 kg) and 40 lbs (18 kg) can be

placed in a forward facing child restraint. Refer tothe manufacturer’s instructions for minimum andmaximum weight and height recommendations.NISSAN recommends that small children beplaced in child restraints that comply with FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choosea child restraint that fits your vehicle and alwaysfollow the manufacturer’s instructions for instal-lation and use.

Larger children

Children who are too large for child restraintsshould be seated and restrained by the seat beltswhich are provided. The seat belt may not fitproperly if the child is less than 4 feet 9 inches(142.5 cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18kg) and 80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should beused to obtain proper seat belt fit.

NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in acommercially available booster seat if the shoul-der belt in the child’s seating position fits close tothe face or neck or if the lap portion of the seatbelt goes across the abdomen. The booster seatshould raise the child so that the shoulder belt isproperly positioned across the top, middle por-tion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low on thehips. A booster seat can only be used in seatingpositions that have a three-point type seat belt.The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and



have a label certifying that it complies with Fed-eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Once the childhas grown so the shoulder belt is no longer on ornear the face and neck, use the shoulder beltwithout the booster seat.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on anyseat and do not allow a child in the cargoareas while the vehicle is moving. Thechild could be seriously injured or killed inan accident or sudden stop.

PREGNANT WOMENNISSAN recommends that pregnant women useseat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug,and always position the lap belt as low as pos-sible around the hips, not the waist. Place theshoulder belt over your shoulder and across yourchest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over yourabdominal area. Contact your doctor for specificrecommendations.

INJURED PERSONSNISSAN recommends that injured persons useseat belts. Check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELTWITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

● Every person who drives or rides in thisvehicle should use a seat belt at alltimes.

● Do not ride in a moving vehicle whenthe seatback is reclined. This can bedangerous. The shoulder belt will notbe against your body. In an accident,you could be thrown into it and receiveneck or other serious injuries. Youcould also slide under the lap belt andreceive serious internal injuries.

● For the most effective protection whenthe vehicle is in motion, the seat shouldbe upright. Always sit well back in theseat with both feet on the floor andadjust the seat belt properly.

Fastening the seat belts

s1 Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in thissection.

Manual front seat shownWRS0174



s2 Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractorand insert the tongue into the buckle untilyou hear and feel the latch engage.

● The retractor is designed to lock duringa sudden stop or on impact. A slowpulling motion permits the seat belt tomove, and allows you some freedom ofmovement in the seat.

● If the seat belt cannot be pulled fromits fully retracted position, firmly pullthe belt and release it. Then smoothlypull the belt out of the retractor.

s3 Position the lap belt portion low and snugon the hips as shown.

s4 Pull the shoulder belt portion toward theretractor to take up extra slack. Be sure theshoulder belt is routed over your shoulderand across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear seatingpositions three-point seat belts have a lockingmechanism for child restraint installation. It isreferred to as the automatic locking mode or childrestraint mode.

When automatic locking mechanism is activatedthe seat belt cannot be extended again until theseat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and

fully retracted. Once retracted, the seat belt is inthe emergency locking mode. See “Child re-straints” later in this section for more information.

The automatic locking mode should beused only for child restraint installation.During normal seat belt use by a passen-ger, the locking mode should not be acti-vated. If it is activated it may cause uncom-fortable seat belt tension. It can alsochange the operation of the front passen-ger air bag. See “Front passenger air bagand status light” later in this section.

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be certainthat the seatbacks are completely se-cured in the latched position. If they arenot completely secured, passengers maybe injured in an accident or sudden stop.

WRS0137 WRS0138



Unfastening the seat belts

s1 To unfasten the seat belt, press the button onthe buckle. The seat belt automatically re-tracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat beltmovement by two separate methods:

● When the seat belt is pulled quickly from theretractor.

● When the vehicle slows down rapidly.

To increase your confidence in the seat belts,check the operation as follows.

● Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forwardquickly. The retractor should lock and re-strict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this check orif you have any questions about seat belt opera-tion, see a NISSAN dealer.

Shoulder belt height adjustment (Frontseats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-justed to the position best for you. (See “Precau-tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section.)To adjust, pull out the adjustment button s1 andmove the shoulder belt anchor to the desiredposition s2 , so the belt passes over the center ofthe shoulder. The belt should be away from yourface and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-der belt anchor into position.

WRS0139 LRS0242



WARNING

● After adjustment, release the adjust-ment button and try to move the shoul-der belt anchor up and down to makesure it is securely fixed in position.

● The shoulder belt anchor height shouldbe adjusted to the position best for you.Failure to do so may reduce the effec-tiveness of the entire restraint systemand increase the chance or severity ofinjury in an accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it isnot possible to properly fit the lap-shoulder beltand fasten it, an extender is available which iscompatible with the installed seat belts. The ex-tender adds approximately 8 inches (200 mm) oflength and may be used for either the driver orfront passenger seating position. See a NISSANdealer for assistance if an extender is required.

WARNING

● Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, madeby the same company which made theoriginal equipment seat belts, shouldbe used with NISSAN seat belts.

● Adults and children who can use thestandard seat belt should not use anextender. Such unnecessary use couldresult in serious personal injury in theevent of an accident.

● Never use seat belt extenders to installchild restraints. If the child restraint isnot secured properly, the child could beseriously injured in a collision or a sud-den stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE● To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a

mild soap solution or any solution recom-mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seatbelts to dry in the shade. Do not allow theseat belts to retract until they are completelydry.

● If dirt builds up in the shoulder beltguide of the seat belt anchors, the seatbelts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulderbelt guide with a clean, dry cloth.

● Periodically check to see that the seatbelt and the metal components, such asbuckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wiresand anchors, work properly. If loose parts,deterioration, cuts or other damage on thewebbing is found, the entire seat belt as-sembly should be replaced.



PRECAUTIONS ON CHILDRESTRAINTS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint can re-sult in serious injury or death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. A rear-facing child restraint must only be usedin the rear seat.

● NISSAN recommends that the child re-straint be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a front facing child re-straint in the front seat, see “Child re-straint installation using the seat belts”later in this section.

● Improper use or improper installationof a child restraint can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

● Follow all of the child restraint manu-facturer’s instructions for installationand use. When purchasing a child re-straint, be sure to select one which willfit your child and vehicle. It may not bepossible to properly install some typesof child restraints in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS



● If the child restraint is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being in-jured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the child restraint, but asupright as possible.

● After attaching the child restraint, test itbefore you place the child in it. Push itfrom side to side while holding the seatnear the LATCH attachment or by theseat belt path. Try to tug it forward andcheck to see if the belt holds the re-straint in place. The child restraintshould not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If the restraint is not secure,tighten the belt as necessary, or put therestraint in another seat and test itagain. You may need to try a differentchild restraint. Not all child restraints fitin all types of vehicles.

● When your child restraint is not in use,keep it secured with the LATCH systemor a seat belt to prevent it from beingthrown around in case of a sudden stopor accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a child restraint left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the childrestraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal childrestraint lower anchor system, referred to as theLATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-dren) system. Some child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to these lower anchors. For details,see the “LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers forCHildren) system” later in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible childrestraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used. See“Child restraint installed using the seat belts”later in this section. In general, child restraints arealso designed to be installed with the lap portionof a lap/shoulder seat belt.

Several manufacturers offer child restraints forinfants and small children of various sizes. Whenselecting any child restraint, keep the followingpoints in mind:

● Choose only a restraint with a label certifyingthat it complies with Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 or Canadian MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the child restraint in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● If the child restraint is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the child restraintand check the various adjustments to besure the child restraint is compatible withyour child. Choose a child restraint that isdesigned for your child’s height and weight.Always follow all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and smallchildren be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.



LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) SYSTEMYour vehicle is equipped with special anchorpoints that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchorsand Tethers for CHildren) system compatiblechild restraints.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to installchild restraints in the rear outboard seating posi-tions only. Do not attempt to install a child re-straint in the center position using the LATCHanchors.

LATCH lower anchor point locations

The LATCH system anchors are located at therear of the seat cushion near the seatback. Alabel is attached to the seatback to help youlocate the LATCH system anchors.

WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown. Ifa child restraint is not secured properly,your child could be seriously injured orkilled in an accident.

● Do not secure a child restraint in thecenter rear seating position using theLATCH system anchors. The child re-straint will not be secured properly.

● The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

LATCH system anchor locationsWRS0718

LATCH lower anchor locationWRS0700



Installing child restraint LATCH anchorattachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include tworigid or webbing-mounted attachments that canbe connected to two anchors located at certainseating positions in your vehicle. This system isknown as the LATCH system. This system mayalso be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIXcompatible system. With this system, you do nothave to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the childrestraint. Check your child restraint for a labelstating that it is compatible with the LATCH sys-

tem. This information may also be in the instruc-tions provided by the child restraint manufac-turer.

LATCH child restraints generally require the useof a top tether strap. See “Top tether strap childrestraint” later in this section for installation in-structions.

When installing a child restraint, carefully readand follow the instructions in this manual andthose supplied with the child restraint. See “Childrestraint installation using LATCH” in this section.

TOP TETHER STRAP CHILDRESTRAINTIf the manufacturer of your child restraint requiresthe use of a top tether strap, it must be secured tothe anchor point.

WARNING

Child restraint anchor points are designedto withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts or harnesses.

LATCH webbing-mounted attachmentLRS0661

LATCH rigid-mounted attachmentLRS0662



Top Tether Anchor Point LocationsAnchor points are located on the rear parcelshelf.

Installing top tether strap

First, secure the child restraint with the seat beltor the LATCH system (rear outboard seat posi-tions only), as applicable.

1. Flip up the anchor cover from the anchorpoint which is located directly behind thechild seat.

2. Remove the head restraint. Store it in asecure location.

3. Position the top tether strap over the top ofthe seat back.

4. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchorbracket that provides the straightest instal-lation.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to themanufacturer’s instructions to remove anyslack.

If you have any questions when installing atop strap child restraint on the rear seat,consult your NISSAN dealer for details.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING LATCH

WARNING

● Attach LATCH system compatible childrestraints only at the locations shown.For the LATCH lower anchor locationssee “LATCH (Latch Anchors and Tethersfor CHildren) system”. If a child restraintis not secured properly, your child couldbe seriously injured or killed in anaccident.

● The LATCH system anchors are de-signed to withstand only those loadsimposed by correctly fitted child re-straints. Under no circumstance arethey to be used for adult seat belts orharnesses.

5–passenger modelsLRS0243

4–passenger modelsLRS0296



● Inspect the lower anchors by insertingyour fingers into the lower anchor areaand feeling to make sure there are noobstructions over the LATCH system an-chors, such as seat belt webbing or seatcushion material. The child restraint willnot be secured properly if the LATCHsystem anchors are obstructed.

Front-facingFollow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors.

3. The back of the child restraint should besecured against the vehicle seat back..

If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraintto obtain the correct child restraint fit. See “Headrestraint adjustment” in this section. If the headrestraint is removed, store it in a secure place. Besure to install the head restraint when the childrestraint is removed. If the seating position doesnot have an adjustable head restraint and it is

interfering with the proper child restraint fit, tryanother seating position or a different child re-straint.

Front facing web-mounted – step 2LRS0663

Front facing rigid-mounted – step 2LRS0664



4. For child restraints that are equipped withwebbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

5. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint. See “Top tether strap child restraint” inthis section. Do not install child restraintsthat require the use of a top tether strap toseating positions that do not have a toptether anchor.

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-tachment and use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug it forwardto make sure that it is securely held in place.It should not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25mm), pull again on the anchor attachmentsto further tighten the child restraint. If you areunable to properly secure the restraint, movethe restraint to another seating position andtry again, or try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Front facing – step 4LRS0671

Front facing – step 6WRS0697



7. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 3through 6.

Rear-facingFollow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using LATCH:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-ments to the LATCH lower anchors. 3. For child restraints that are equipped with

webbing mounted attachments, remove anyadditional slack from the anchor attach-ments. Press downward and rearward firmlyin the center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while tightening the webbingof the anchor attachments.

Rear facing web-mounted – step 2LRS0665

Rear facing rigid-mounted – step 2LRS0666



4. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the LATCH at-tachment and use force to push the childrestraint from side to side, and tug it forwardto make sure that it is securely held in place.It should not move more than 1 inch (25mm). If it does move more than 1 inch (25mm), pull again on the anchor attachmentsto further tighten the child restraint. If you areunable to properly secure the restraint, movethe restraint to another seating position andtry again, or try a different child restraint. Notall child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If thechild restraint is loose, repeat steps 2through 3.

CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATIONUSING THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front passengerseat. Supplemental front air bags in-flate with great force. A rear-facingchild restraint could be struck by thesupplemental front air bag in a crashand could seriously injure or kill yourchild.


Front facing – step 4LRS0674 WRS0256



● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a forward-facing child restraint in the front pas-senger seat, move the passenger seatto the rearmost position. Also, be surethe front passenger air bag status lightis illuminated to indicate the passengerair bag is OFF. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” earlier in this sec-tion for details.

● The three-point seat belt in your vehicleis equipped with an automatic lockingmode retractor which must be usedwhen installing a child restraint.

● Failure to use the retractor’s lockingmode will result in the child restraintnot being properly secured. The re-straint could tip over or otherwise beunsecured and cause injury to the childin a sudden stop or collision. Also, it canchange the operation of the front pas-senger air bag. See “Front passengerair bag and status light” later in thissection.

● A child restraint with a top tether strapshould not be used in the front passen-ger seat.


The instructions in this section apply to childrestraint installation using the vehicle seat belts inthe rear seat or the front passenger seat.

Front-facingFollow these steps to install a front-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rearseats or in the front passenger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint inthe front seat, it should be placed in afront-facing direction only. Move theseat to the rearmost position. Childrestraints for infants must be used inthe rear-facing direction and thereforemust not be used in the front seat.

Front-facing (front passenger seat) – step 1WRS0699


Z REVIEW COPY—2007 Maxima (max)Owners Manual—USA_English (nna)04/06/06—cathy X

A child restraint can only be installed in the rearcenter position of 5-passenger models. Do notattempt to install a child restraint on the rearconsole of the 4-passenger model.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-ways follow the child restraint manufactur-er’s instructions

The back of the child restraint should be securedagainst the vehicle seat back. If necessary, adjustor remove the head restraint to obtain the correctchild restraint fit. See “Head restraint adjust-ment” in this section.

If the head restraint is removed, store it in asecure place. Be sure to install the head restraintwhen the child restraint is removed. If the seatingposition does not have an adjustable head re-straint and it is interfering with the proper childrestraint fit, try another seating position or a dif-ferent child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

4. Pull on the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to emergency lock-ing mode when the seat belt is fully re-tracted.





5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the seatbelt; press downward and rearward firmly inthe center of the child restraint with yourknee to compress the vehicle seat cushionand seatback while pulling up on the seatbelt.

7. If the child restraint is equipped with a toptether strap, route the top tether strap andsecure the tether strap to the tether anchorpoint (rear seat installation only). See “Toptether strap child restraint” in this section.Do not install child restraints that require theuse of a top tether strap to seating positionsthat do not have a top tether anchor.






8. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the seat beltpath and use force to push the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. It shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If itdoes move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pullagain on the shoulder belt to further tightenthe child restraint. If you are unable to prop-erly secure the restraint, move the restraintto another seating position and try again, ortry a different child restraint. Not all childrestraints fit in all types of vehicles.

9. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore belt webbing out of the retractor, theretractor is in the automatic locking mode.

10. Check to make sure the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If theseat belt is not locked, repeat steps 3through 8.

11. If the child restraint is installed in the frontpassenger seat, turn the ignition switch tothe ON position. The passenger air bag sta-tus light should illuminate. If this lightis not illuminated see 9Front passenger airbag and status light9 in this section. Movethe child restraint to another seatingposition. Have the system checked by aNISSAN dealer.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt is fully retracted, the automatic locking modechild restraint mode) is canceled.

Rear-facing

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing childrestraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rearseats:


Rear-facing – step 1WRS0256



1. Child restraints for infants must beused in the rear-facing direction andtherefore must not be used in the frontseat. A child restraint can only be installed inthe rear center position of 5-passengermodels. Do not attempt to install a childrestraint on the rear console of the4-passenger model. Position the child re-straint on the seat. Always follow the re-straint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the childrestraint and insert it into the buckle until youhear and feel the latch engage. Be sure tofollow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions for belt routing.

3. Pull on the shoulder belt until the belt is fullyextended. At this time, the seat belt retractoris in the automatic locking mode (child re-straint mode). It reverts to emergency lock-ing mode when the seat belt is fully re-tracted.

Rear facing – step 2WRS0682

Rear facing – step 3LRS0669



4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on theshoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the childrestraint; press downward and rearwardfirmly in the center of the child restraint tocompress the vehicle seat cushion and seat-back while pulling up on the seat belt.

6. Before placing the child in the child restraint,hold the child restraint near the seat beltpath and use force to push the child restraintfrom side to side, and tug it forward to makesure that it is securely held in place. It shouldnot move more than 1 inch (25 mm). If itdoes move more than 1 inch (25 mm), pullagain on the shoulder belt to further tightenthe child restraint. If you are unable to prop-erly secure the restraint, move the restraintto another rear seating position and tryagain, or try a different child restraint. Not allchild restraints fit in all types of vehicles.

Rear facing – step 4LRS0670





7. Check that the retractor is in the automaticlocking mode by trying to pull more seat beltout of the retractor. If you cannot pull anymore seat belt webbing out of the retractor,the retractor is in the automatic lockingmode

8. Check to make sure that the child restraint isproperly secured prior to each use. If the beltis not locked, repeat steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the seatbelt fully retracted, the automatic locking modechild restraint mode) is canceled.

PRECAUTIONS ON BOOSTERSEATS

WARNING

● Infants and small children should al-ways be placed in an appropriate childrestraint while riding in the vehicle.Failure to use a child restraint orbooster seat can result in serious injuryor death.

● Infants and small children should neverbe carried on your lap. It is not possiblefor even the strongest adult to resist theforces of a severe accident. The childcould be crushed between the adult andparts of the vehicle. Also, do not put thesame seat belt around both your childand yourself.

● NISSAN recommends that the boosterseat be installed in the rear seat. Ac-cording to accident statistics, childrenare safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat. Ifyou must install a booster seat in thefront seat, see “Booster seat installa-tion” in this section.

● A booster seat must only be installed ina seating position that has alap/shoulder belt. Failure to use athree-point type seat belt with abooster seat can result in a serious in-jury in sudden stop or collision.

● Improper use or improper installationof a booster seat can increase the riskor severity of injury for both the childand other occupants of the vehicle andcan lead to serious injury or death in anaccident.

ARS1098

BOOSTER SEATS



● Do not use towels, books, pillows orother items in place of a booster seat.Items such as these may move duringnormal driving or a collision and resultin serious injury or death. Booster seatsare designed to be used with alap/shoulder belt. Booster seats are de-signed to properly route the lap andshoulder portions of the seat belt overthe strongest portions of a child’s bodyto provide the maximum protection dur-ing a collision.

● Follow all of the booster seat manufac-turer’s instructions for installation anduse. When purchasing a booster seat,be sure to select one which will fit yourchild and vehicle. It may not be possibleto properly install some types ofbooster seats in your vehicle.

● If the booster seat and seat belt is notused properly, the risk of a child beinginjured in a collision or a sudden stopgreatly increases.

● Adjustable seatbacks should be posi-tioned to fit the booster seat, but asupright as possible.

● After placing the child in the boosterseat and fastening the seat belt, makesure the shoulder portion of the belt isaway from the child’s face and neck andthe lap portion of the belt does notcross the abdomen.

● Do not put the shoulder belt behind thechild or under the child’s arm. If youmust install a booster seat in the frontseat, see “Booster seat installation”later in this section.

● When your booster seat is not in use,keep it secured with a seat belt to pre-vent it from being thrown around incase of a sudden stop or accident.

CAUTION

Remember that a booster seat left in aclosed vehicle can become very hot.Check the seating surface and bucklesbefore placing your child in the boosterseat.

Booster seats of various sizes are offered byseveral manufacturers. When selecting anybooster seat, keep the following points in mind:

● Choose only a booster seat with a labelcertifying that it complies with Federal MotorVehicle Safety Standard 213 or CanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

● Check the booster seat in your vehicle to besure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seatand seat belt system.

● Make sure the child’s head will be properlysupported by the booster seat or vehicleseat. The seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. For example, if a

LRS0455



low back booster seat s1 is chosen, thevehicle seat back must be at or above thecenter of the child’s ears. If the seat back islower than the center of the child’s ears, ahigh back booster seat s2 should be used.

● If the booster seat is compatible with yourvehicle, place your child in the booster seatand check the various adjustments to besure the booster seat is compatible with yourchild. Always follow all recommended pro-cedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces orterritories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved childrestraint at all times while the vehicle isbeing operated.

The instructions in this section apply to boosterseat installation in the rear seats or the frontpassenger seat.

BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

WARNING

● NISSAN recommends that child re-straints be installed in the rear seat.However, if you must install a boosterseat in the front passenger seat, movethe passenger’s seat to the rearmostposition.


CAUTION

Do not use the lap/shoulder belt auto-matic locking mode when using a boosterseat with the seat belts. Follow thesesteps to install a booster seat in the rearseat or in the front passenger seat:

LRS0453 LRS0464



1. If you must install a booster seat in thefront seat, move the seat to the rear-most position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Onlyplace it in a front facing direction. Alwaysfollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned onthe vehicle seat so that it is stable. If neces-sary, adjust or remove the head restraint toobtain the correct booster seat fit. See“Head restraint adjustment” earlier in thissection. If the head restraint is removed,store it in a secure place. Be sure to installthe head restraint when the booster seat isremoved. If the seating position does nothave an adjustable head restraint and it isinterfering with the proper booster seat fit,try another seating position or a differentbooster seat.

WRS0699Center position (for 5-passenger models

only)

LRS0451

Outboard positionLRS0452



4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt lowand snug on the child’s hips. Be sure tofollow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-structions for adjusting the belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belttoward the retractor to take up extra slack.Be sure the shoulder belt is positionedacross the top, middle portion of the child’sshoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seatmanufacturer’s instructions for adjusting thebelt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-tions for properly fastening a seat beltshown in the “Three-point seat belt withretractor” earlier in this section.

7. If the booster is installed in the front passen-ger seat: When the ignition switch is turnedto the ON position, the passenger air bagstatus light may or may not be illumi-nated, depending on the size of the child andthe type of booster seat being used. See“Front passenger air bag and status light”later in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ONSUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM

This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-tion contains important information concerningthe driver and passenger supplemental front airbags (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System),supplemental side air bags, curtain side-impactair bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.

Supplemental front impact air bag system:The NISSAN advanced air bag system can helpcushion the impact force to the head and chest ofthe driver and front passenger in certain frontalcollisions.

Supplemental side-impact air bag system:This system can help cushion the impact force tothe chest and pelvic area of the driver and frontpassenger in certain side impact collisions. Thefront seat side-impact supplemental side air bagsare designed to inflate on the side where thevehicle is impacted.

Supplemental curtain side-impact air bagsystem: This system can help cushion the im-pact force to the head of occupants in front andrear outboard seating positions in certain sideimpact collisions. The curtain side-impact airbags are designed to inflate on the side wherethe vehicle is impacted.

Front passenger positionLRS0454

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINTSYSTEM



These supplemental restraint systems are de-signed to supplement the crash protection pro-vided by the driver and front passenger seat beltsand are not a substitute for them. Seat beltsshould always be correctly worn and the occu-pant seated a suitable distance away from thesteering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section forinstructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)

The supplemental air bags operate onlywhen the ignition switch is in the ON orSTART position.

After turning the ignition key to the ONposition, the supplemental air bag warninglight illuminates. The supplemental air bagwarning light will turn off after about 7seconds if the system is operational.

WARNING

● The supplemental front air bags ordi-narily will not inflate in the event of aside impact, rear impact, rollover, orlower severity frontal collision. Alwayswear your seat belts to help reduce therisk or severity of injury in various kindsof accidents.

● The front passenger air bag will notinflate if the passenger air bag statuslight is lit or if the front passenger seatis unoccupied. See “Front passenger airbag and status light” later in thissection.

WRS0031



● The seat belts and the supplementalfront air bags are most effective whenyou are sitting well back and upright inthe seat. The front air bags inflate withgreat force. Even with the NISSAN Ad-vanced Air Bag System, if you are unre-strained, leaning forward, sitting side-ways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the supplementalfront air bag if you are up against itwhen it inflates. Always sit back againstthe seatback and as far away as practi-cal from the steering wheel or instru-ment panel. Always use the seat belts.

● The driver and front passenger seat beltbuckles are equipped with sensors thatdetect if the seat belts are fastened. Theadvanced air bag system monitors theseverity of a collision and seat belt us-age then inflates the air bags. Failure toproperly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in anaccident.

● The front passenger seat is equippedwith an occupant classification sensor(pressure sensor) that turns the frontpassenger air bag OFF under someconditions. This sensor is only used inthis seat. Failure to be properly seatedand wearing the seat belt can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an acci-dent. See “Front Passenger air bag andstatus light” later in this section.

● Keep hands on the outside of the steer-ing wheel. Placing them inside thesteering wheel rim could increase therisk that they are injured when thesupplemental front air bag inflates.



WARNING

● Never let children ride unrestrained orextend their hands or face out of thewindow. Do not attempt to hold them inyour lap or arms. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041



ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044



WARNING

● Children may be severely injured orkilled when the supplemental front airbags, side air bags or curtain side-impact air bags inflate if they are notproperly restrained. Pre-teens and chil-dren should be properly restrained inthe rear seat, if possible.

● Even with the NISSAN Advanced AirBag System, never install a rear-facingchild restraint in the front seat. An in-flating supplemental front air bag couldseriously injure or kill your child. See“Child restraints” earlier in this sectionfor details.

ARS1045 WRS0256



WARNING

Supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag:

● The supplemental side air bag and cur-tain side-impact air bag ordinarily willnot inflate in the event of a frontal im-pact, rear impact, rollover or lower se-verity side collision. Always wear yourseat belts to help reduce the risk orseverity of injury in various kinds ofaccidents.

WARNING

● The seat belts, the supplemental sideair bags and curtain side-impact airbags are most effective when you aresitting well back and upright in the seat.The side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag inflate with great force. Do notallow anyone to place their hand, leg orface near the side air bag on the side ofthe seatback of the front seat or nearthe side roof rails. Do not allow anyonesitting in the front seats or rear out-board seats to extend their hand out ofthe window or lean against the door.Some examples of dangerous ridingpositions are shown in the previousillustrations.

SSS0101 SSS0188



WARNING

● When sitting in the rear seat, do nothold onto the seatback of the front seat.If the side air bag inflates, you may beseriously injured. Be especially carefulwith children, who should always beproperly restrained. Some examples ofdangerous riding positions are shownin the illustrations.

● Do not use seat covers on the frontseatbacks. They may interfere withsupplemental side air bag inflation.

WRS0032 SSS0159 SSS0162



1. SRS curtain side-impact air bag mod-ules

2. SRS curtain side-impact air bags3. Supplemental side air bag modules4. Diagnosis sensor unit5. Supplemental front air bag modules

6. Crash zone sensor7. Occupant classification system control

unit8. Seat belt buckle switches for driver’s

and passenger’s side

9. Occupant classification sensor (pres-sure sensor)

10. Seat belt pre-tensioner retractor11. Side satellite sensor12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System(front seats)

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN ad-vanced air bag system for the driver and frontpassenger seats. This system is designed tomeet certification requirements under U.S. regu-lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,all of the information, cautions and warn-ings in this manual still apply and must befollowed.

The driver supplemental front air bag is located inthe center of the steering wheel. The passengersupplemental front air bag is mounted in thedashboard above the glove box. The supplemen-tal front air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity frontal collisions, although they may in-flate if the forces in another type of collision aresimilar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental front air bagsystem operation.

WRS0466



The NISSAN advanced air bag system has dualstage inflators. It also monitors information fromthe crash zone sensor, the diagnosis sensor unit,seat belt buckle sensors, occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor) and passenger seatbelt tension sensor. Inflator operation is based onthe severity of a collision and seat belt usage forthe driver. For the front passenger, it additionallymonitors the weight of an occupant or object onthe seat and seat belt tension. Based on informa-tion from the sensors, only one front air bag mayinflate in a crash, depending on the crash severityand whether the front occupants are belted orunbelted. Additionally, the front passenger airbag may be automatically turned OFF undersome conditions, depending on the weight de-tected on the passenger seat and how the seatbelt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,the passenger air bag status light will be illumi-nated (if the seat is unoccupied, the light will notbe illuminated, but the air bag will be off). See“Front passenger air bag and status light” later inthis section for further details. One front air baginflating does not indicate improper performanceof the system.

If you have any questions about your air bagsystem, please contact NISSAN or your NISSANdealer. If you are considering modification of yourvehicle due to a disability, you may also contact

NISSAN. Contact information is contained in thefront of this Owner’s Manual.

When a supplemental front air bag inflates, afairly loud noise may be heard, followed by therelease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful anddoes not indicate a fire. Care should be taken tonot inhale it, as it may cause irritation and chok-ing. Those with a history of a breathing conditionshould get fresh air promptly.

Supplemental front air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe face and chest of the front occupants. Theycan help save lives and reduce serious injuries.However, an inflating front air bag may causefacial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bagsdo not provide restraint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat beltsshould be correctly worn and the driver and pas-senger seated upright as far as practical awayfrom the steering wheel or instrument panel. Thesupplemental front air bags inflate quickly in orderto help protect the front occupants. Because ofthis, the force of the front air bag inflating canincrease the risk of injury if the occupant is tooclose to, or is against, the front air bag moduleduring inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.

The supplemental front air bags operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ONor START position.




Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed toautomatically turn OFF under some con-ditions. Read this section carefully tolearn how it operates. Proper use of theseat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-essary for most effective protection. Fail-ure to follow all instructions in thismanual concerning the use of seats, seatbelts and child restraints can increase therisk or severity of injury in an accident.

Status light

The front passenger air bag status light islocated below the radio. The light operates asfollows:

● Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The isOFF and the front passenger air bag is OFFand will not inflate in a crash.

● Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,child or child restraint as outlined in thissection: The illuminates to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is OFF andwill not inflate in a crash.

● Occupied passenger seat and the passen-ger meets the conditions outlined in thissection: The light is OFF to indicatethat the front passenger air bag is opera-tional.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operatedunder some conditions as described below inaccordance with U.S. regulations. If the frontpassenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in acrash. The driver air bag and other air bags in yourvehicle are not part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help reducethe risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag

to certain front passenger seat occupants, suchas children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-matically turned OFF. Certain sensors are usedto meet the requirements.

One sensor used is the occupant classificationsensor (pressure sensor). It is in the bottom of thefront passenger seat cushion and is designed todetect an occupant and objects on the seat byweight. It works together with seat belt sensorsdescribed later. For example, if a child is in thefront passenger seat, the advanced air bag sys-tem is designed to turn the passenger air bagOFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if achild restraint of the type specified in the regula-tions is on the seat, its weight and the child’sweight can be detected and cause the air bag toturn OFF. Occupant classification sensor opera-tion can vary depending on the front passengerseat belt sensors.

The front passenger seat belt sensors are de-signed to detect if the seat belt is buckled and theamount of tension on the seat belt, such as whenit is in the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode). Based on the weight on the seat detectedby the occupant classification sensor and the belttension detected on the seat belt, the advancedair bag system determines whether the front pas-senger air bag should be automatically turnedOFF as required by the regulations.

LRS0316



Front passenger seat adult occupants who areproperly seated and using the seat belt as out-lined in this manual should not cause the passen-ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Forsmall adults it may be turned OFF, however if theoccupant takes his/her weight off the seat cush-ion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sittingon an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being outof position), this could cause the sensor to turnthe air bag OFF. In addition, if the occupantimproperly uses the seat belt in the automaticlocking mode (child restraint mode), this couldcause the air bag to be turned OFF. Always besure to be seated and wearing the seat beltproperly for the most effective protection by theseat belt and supplemental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.NISSAN also recommends that appropriate childrestraints and booster seats be properly installedin a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupantclassification sensor and seat belt sensors aredesigned to operate as described above to turnthe front passenger air bag OFF for specifiedchild restraints as required by the regulations.Failing to properly secure child restraints and touse the automatic locking mode (child restraintmode) may allow the restraint to tip or move in anaccident or sudden stop. This can also result inthe passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead

of being OFF. See “Child restraints” earlier in thissection for proper use and installation.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied thepassenger air bag is designed not to inflate in acrash. However, heavy objects placed on theseat could result in air bag inflation, because ofthe object’s weight detected by the occupantclassification sensor. Other conditions could alsoresult in air bag inflation, such as if a child isstanding on the seat, or if two children are on theseat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupantsare seated and restrained properly.

Using the passenger air bag status light, you canmonitor when the front passenger air bag is au-tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.The light will not illuminate when the front pas-senger seat is unoccupied.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicatingthat the air bag is OFF), it could be that theperson is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seatproperly or not using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,the passenger air bag status light may or may notbe illuminated, depending on the size of the childand the type of child restraint being used. If thepassenger air bag status light is not illuminated(indicating that the air bag might inflate in a

crash), it could be that the child restraint or seatbelt is not being used properly. In rare cases, thepassenger air bag status light will not illuminateeven though the air bag is OFF.

If such situations happen, properly position andrestrain the occupant or child restraint. Other-wise reposition the occupant or child restraint ina rear seat. If you have any questions aboutwhether your passenger air bag is working asdesigned, your NISSAN dealer can confirm that itis working properly by using a special tool.

The air bag system and passenger air bag statuslight will take a few seconds to register a changein the passenger seat status. For example, if alarge adult who is sitting in the front passengerseat exits the vehicle, the passenger air bagstatus light will go from OFF to ON for a fewseconds and then to OFF. This is normal systemoperation and does not indicate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger airbag system, the supplemental air bag warninglight , located in the meter and gauges areain the center of the instrument panel, will blink.Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.



Other supplemental front air bag precau-tions

WARNING

● Do not place any objects on the steer-ing wheel pad or on the instrumentpanel. Also, do not place any objectsbetween any occupant and the steeringwheel or instrument panel. Such ob-jects may become dangerous projec-tiles and cause injury if the supplemen-tal front air bag inflates.

● Immediately after inflation, severalfront air bag system components will behot. Do not touch them; you may se-verely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe supplemental air bag system. This isto prevent accidental inflation of thesupplemental air bag or damage to thesupplemental air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or front end structure.This could affect proper operation ofthe supplemental front air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental frontair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. Tampering includeschanges to the steering wheel and theinstrument panel assembly by placingmaterial over the steering wheel padand above the instrument panel or byinstalling additional trim materialaround the air bag system.

● Modifying or tampering with the frontpassenger seat may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial on the seat cushion or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, on the seat that are not specifi-cally designed to assure proper air bagoperation. Additionally, do not stow anyobjects under the front passenger seator the seat cushion and seatback. Suchobjects may interfere with the properoperation of the occupant classifica-tion sensor (pressure sensor).

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe seat belt system. This may affect thesupplemental front air bag system.Tampering with the seat belt systemmay result in serious personal injury.

● Work on and around the supplementalfront air bag system should be done bya NISSAN dealer. Installation of electri-cal equipment should also be done by aNISSAN dealer. The Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) wiring should notbe modified or disconnected. Unautho-rized electrical test equipment andprobing devices should not be used onthe air bag system.

● A cracked windshield should be re-placed immediately by a qualified re-pair facility. A cracked windshield couldaffect the function of the supplementalair bag system.

● The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easyidentification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental front airbag system and guide the buyer to the appropri-ate sections in this Owner’s Manual.



Supplemental side-impact air bag andcurtain side-impact air bags systemThe supplemental side-impact air bags are lo-cated in the outside of the seatback of the frontseats. The supplemental curtain side-impact airbags are located in the side roof rails. Thesesystems are designed to meet voluntary guide-lines to help reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occupants. However, all of the infor-mation, cautions and warnings in thismanual still apply and must be followed.The supplemental side air bags and curtain side-impact air bags are designed to inflate in higherseverity side collisions, although they may inflateif the forces in another type of collision are similar

to those of a higher severity side impact. They aredesigned to inflate on the side where the vehicleis impacted. They may not inflate in certain sidecollisions.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always anindication of proper supplemental side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag operation.

When the supplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag inflate, a fairly loud noise maybe heard, followed by release of smoke. Thissmoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it maycause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

Supplemental side air bags, along with the use ofseat belts, help to cushion the impact force onthe chest and pelvic area of the front occupants.Curtain side-impact air bags help to cushion theimpact force to the head of occupants in the frontand rear outboard seating positions. They canhelp save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-ever, an inflating side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag may cause abrasions or otherinjuries. Supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bags do not provide restraint tothe lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn and thedriver and passenger seated upright as far aspractical away from the supplemental side airbag. Rear seat passengers should be seated asfar away as practical from the door finishers andside roof rails. The side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag inflate quickly in order to helpprotect the front occupants. Because of this, theforce of the side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag inflating can increase the risk of injury ifthe occupant is too close to, or is against, theseair bag modules during inflation. The side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag will deflatequickly after the collision is over.

The supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bags operate only when theignition switch is in the ON or START posi-tions.


LRS0259



WARNING

● Do not place any objects near the seat-back of the front seats. Also, do notplace any objects (an umbrella, bag,etc.) between the front door finisherand the front seat. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles andcause injury if the supplemental side airbag inflates.

● Right after inflation, several side air bagand curtain side-impact air bag systemcomponents will be hot. Do not touchthem; you may severely burn yourself.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe side air bag and curtain side-impactair bag system. This is to prevent acci-dental inflation of the side air bag andcurtain side-impact air bag or damageto the side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag system.

● Do not make unauthorized changes toyour vehicle’s electrical system, sus-pension system or side panel. Thiscould affect proper operation of thesupplemental side air bag and curtainside-impact air bag system.

● Tampering with the supplemental sideair bag system may result in seriouspersonal injury. For example, do notchange the front seats by placing mate-rial near the seatbacks or by installingadditional trim material, such as seatcovers, around the side air bag.

● Work around and on the curtain air bagsystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. The SRS wiring harnesses*should not be modified or discon-nected. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the side air bag or cur-tain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors areyellow and orange for easy identification.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag system andguide the buyer to the appropriate sections in thisOwner’s Manual.

Pre-tensioner seat belt system (Frontseats)

WARNING

● The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot bereused after activation. It must be re-placed together with the retractor andbuckle as a unit.

● If the vehicle becomes involved in afrontal collision but the pre-tensioner isnot activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if nec-essary, replaced by your NISSANdealer.

● No unauthorized changes should bemade to any components or wiring ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt system. Thisis to prevent accidental activation ofthe pre-tensioner seat belt or damageto the pre-tensioner seat belt operation.Tampering with the pre-tensioner seatbelt system may result in serious per-sonal injury.



● Work around and on the pre-tensionersystem should be done by a NISSANdealer. Installation of electrical equip-ment should also be done by a NISSANdealer. Unauthorized electrical testequipment and probing devices shouldnot be used on the pre-tensioner seatbelt system.

● If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct pre-tensionerdisposal procedures are set forth in theappropriate NISSAN Service Manual.Incorrect disposal procedures couldcause personal injury.

The front seat pre-tensioner seat belt systemactivates in conjunction with the supplemental airbag systems. Working with the seat belt retrac-tor, it helps tighten the seat belt when the vehiclebecomes involved in certain types of collisions,helping to restrain front seat occupants.

The pre-tensioner is encased with the seat belt’sretractor. These seat belts are used the same asconventional seat belts.

When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates,smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard.This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate afire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may

cause irritation and choking. Those with a historyof a breathing condition should get fresh airpromptly.

After the pre-tensioner seat belts have activated,load limiters allow the seat belt to release web-bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against thechest.

If any abnormality occurs in the pre-tensionersystem, the supplemental air bag warninglight will not come on, will flash intermit-tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain onafter the ignition key has been turned to the ON orSTART position. In this case, the pre-tensionerseat belt may not function properly. They must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

When selling your vehicle, we request that youinform the buyer about the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem and guide the buyer to the appropriatesections in this Owner’s Manual.

1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (locatedon the sun visors)

2. SRS Side Air Bag Warning Labels (lo-cated on the door pillar)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LABELSWarning labels about the supplemental front airbag, supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag systems are placed in the vehicleas shown in the illustration.

WRS0169



SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAGWARNING LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,displaying in the instrument panel, moni-tors the circuits of the supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tems. The circuits monitored by the supplementalair bag warning light are the diagnosis sensorunit, crash zone sensor, satellite sensors, front airbag modules, side air bag modules, curtain side-impact air bag modules, pre-tensioner seat beltsand all related wiring.

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bag, supplemental side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag and pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servicing:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Under these conditions, the supplemental frontair bag, supplemental side air bags and curtainside-impact air bag or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems may not operate properly. It must bechecked and repaired. Take your vehicle to thenearest NISSAN dealer.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systemsand/or pre-tensioner seat belt systemswill not operate in an accident. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, haveyour vehicle checked by a NISSAN dealeras soon as possible.

Repair and replacement procedure

The supplemental front air bags, supplementalside air bags, curtain side-impact air bags andpre-tensioner seat belts are designed to inflateon a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless itis damaged, the supplemental air bag warninglight remains illuminated after inflation has oc-curred. Repair and replacement of these supple-mental air bag systems should be done only by aNISSAN dealer.

When maintenance work is required on the ve-hicle, the supplemental front air bags, supple-mental side air bags, curtain side-impact airbags, pre-tensioner seat belts and related partsshould be pointed out to the person performingthe maintenance. The ignition key should alwaysbe in the LOCK position when working under thehood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100



WARNING

● Once a supplemental front air bag,supplemental side air bag or curtainside-impact air bag has inflated, the airbag module will not function again andmust be replaced. Additionally, if any ofthe supplemental front air bags inflate,the activated pre-tensioner seat beltsmust also be replaced. The air bag mod-ule and pre-tensioner seat belt systemshould be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.The air bag module and pre-tensionerseat belt system cannot be repaired.

● The supplemental front air bag, side airbag and curtain side-impact air bag sys-tems, and the pre-tensioner seat beltsystem should be inspected by aNISSAN dealer if there is any damage tothe front end or side portion of thevehicle.

● If you need to dispose of the supple-mental air bag, pre-tensioner seat beltsystem or scrap the vehicle, contact aNISSAN dealer. Correct supplementalair bag and pre-tensioner seat belt sys-tem disposal procedures are set forth inthe appropriate NISSAN ServiceManual. Incorrect disposal procedurescould cause personal injury.




MEMO

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Meters and gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6

Compass display (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6Zone variation change procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . 2-10Checking bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Security systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Daytime running light system (Canada only) . . . . . . 2-24Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27Heated seats (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28Heated steering wheel (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29Traction control system (TCS) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Rear sonar system off switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . 2-30Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32

Map pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Rear center console (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36


Covered storage box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37Cargo nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38

SkyView™ glass-paneled roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40Sunroof (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40

Automatic sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Rear sun shade (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44

Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45HomeLinkT universal transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46

Programming HomeLinkT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46Programming HomeLinkT for Canadiancustomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Operating the HomeLinkT universaltransceiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48Programming trouble-diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Clearing the programmed information . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48Reprogramming a single HomeLinkT button . . . . . . 2-48If your vehicle is stolen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49


1. Side and center ventilators (P. 4-18)2. Headlight/fog light/turn signal switch

(P. 2-22)3. Steering wheel switch for audio control

and BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem (if so equipped) (P. 4-42, 4-44)

4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn

(P. 1-37, P. 2-27)6. Security indicator light (P. 2-17)7. Cruise control main/set switches

(P. 5-14)

8. Windshield wiper/washer switch(P. 2-20)

9. Display screen/Navigation system*(P. 4-2, P. 4-6)

10. Display screen/Navigation system*controls (P. 4-2, P. 4-6)

11. Front passenger supplemental air bag(P. 1-37)

12. Glove box (P. 2-35)13. Audio system controls (P. 4-22)14. Climate controls (P. 4-19)15. Storage (P. 2-32)16. Power outlet (P. 2-31)17. Shift selector lever (P. 5-9)18. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-27)19. Passenger air bag status light (P. 1-47)20. Ignition switch (P. 5-6)21. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls

(P. 3-24)22. Traction control system (TCS) off

switch (if so equipped) (P. 2-29) orVehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch (if so equipped) (P. 2-30)

23. Rear sonar system off switch (if soequipped) (P. 2-30)

24. Outside mirror controls (P. 3-28)25. Instrument brightness control (P. 2-25)

LIC0988

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls


*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual (if so equipped).


1. Tachometer2. Warning/indicator lights3. Speedometer4. Fuel gauge5. Engine coolant temperature gauge6. Odometer (total/twin trip)

.

LIC0989

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3


SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

SpeedometerThe speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayedwhen the ignition switch is in the ON position.

The odometer s1 records the total distance thevehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer s2 records the distanceof individual trips.

Changing the display

Push the change button s3 to change the displayas follows:

Trip → Trip → Trip

Resetting the trip odometer:

Push the change button s3 for more than 1second to reset the trip odometer to zero.

Elapsed time, driving distance and averagespeed information is also available. Refer to“Control panel buttons” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems”section later in this manual.

LIC0990 LIC0991



TACHOMETERThe tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the engineinto the red zone s1 .

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the redzone, shift to a higher gear. Operating theengine in the red zone may cause seriousengine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-ture. The engine coolant temperature is within thenormal range s1 when the gauge needle pointswithin the zone shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies with theoutside air temperature and driving conditions.

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-ture near the hot (H) end of the normalrange, reduce vehicle speed to decreasetemperature. If the gauge is over the nor-mal range, stop the vehicle as soon assafely possible. If the engine is over-heated, continued operation of the ve-hicle may seriously damage the engine.See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “Incase of emergency”section for immediateaction required.

LIC0992 WIC1009



FUEL GAUGEThe gauge indicates the approximate fuel levelin the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during braking,turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.

The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after theignition key is turned to OFF.

The low fuel warning light ( ) comes onwhen the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-ters E (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler door islocated on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

CAUTION

● If the vehicle runs out of fuel,

the malfunction indicator light

(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon aspossible. After a few driving trips,

the light should turn off. If the

light remains on after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see “Mal-function indicator light (MIL)” later inthis section.

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

With the ignition switch in the ON position, pressthe button as described in the chart belowto activate various features of the automatic anti-glare review mirror.

Push and holdthebutton for about:

Feature:(Push button again for about 1 sec-ond to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 secondsCompass zone can be changed tocorrect false compass readings

9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode

For information about the automatic anti-glarefeature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-ments” section.

WIC0993

COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)



Push the button for about 1 second whenthe ignition key is in the ON position to toggle thecompass display s1 on or off. The display willindicate the direction of the vehicle’s heading.

N: NorthE: EastS: SouthW: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass bydriving the vehicle in three complete circles atless than 5 MPH (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by drivingyour vehicle on your everyday route. The com-pass will be calibrated once it has tracked threecomplete circles.

LIC0583



ZONE VARIATION CHANGEPROCEDURE

The difference between magnetic north and geo-graphical north is known as variance. In someareas, this difference can sometimes be greatenough to cause false compass readings. Followthese instructions to set the variance for yourparticular location if this happens:

1. Press and hold the button for about 5seconds. The current zone number will ap-pear in the display. Release the button.

2. Find your current location on the zone map.Refer to the illustration.

3. Press the button repeatedly to togglethrough the zone numbers until the desirednumber appears in the display. Once youhave selected a zone number, the displaywill show a compass direction within a fewseconds.

Inaccurate compass direction:

The compass display is equipped with automaticcorrection function. If the correct direction is notshown, follow this procedure.

1. With the display turned on, press and holdthe switch for about 9 seconds. Thedisplay will read “C.”WIC0355



2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehiclein three complete circles at a maximumspeed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the displayshould return to normal.

● If the compass deviates from the correctindication soon after repeated adjustment,have the compass checked at an authorizeddealer.

● The compass may not indicate the correctcompass point in tunnels or while driving upor down a steep hill. (The compass returnsto the correct compass point when the ve-hicle moves to an area where the geomag-netism is stabilized.)

CAUTION

● Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,which are attached to the vehicle bymeans of a magnet. They affect the op-eration of the compass.

● When cleaning the mirror, use a papertowel or similar material dampenedwith glass cleaner. Do not spray glasscleaner directly on the mirror as it maycause the liquid cleaner to enter themirror housing.



or Anti-lock brake warning light Low windshield washer fluid warning light Cruise SET switch indicator light

or Brake warning light P Position selecting warning light Front passenger air bag status light

Charge warning light Seat belt warning light and chime High beam indicator light (Blue)

Door open warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Malfunction indicator light (MIL)

Engine oil pressure warning light Trunk lid open warning light Slip indicator light (if so equipped)

Intelligent Key system warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) indi-cator light

Traction control system off indicator light (if soequipped)

Low fuel warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) po-sition indicator light

Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low tire pressure warning light CRUISE main switch indicator light Vehicle dynamic control off indicator light (if soequipped)

CHECKING BULBS

With all doors closed, apply the parking brakeand turn the ignition key to the ON positionwithout starting the engine. The following lightswill come on:

, or , , ,

If equipped, the following lights come on brieflyand then go off:

or , , , , ,, , ,

If any light fails to come on, it may indicatea burned-out bulb or an open circuit in theelectrical system. Have the system repairedpromptly.

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS ANDAUDIBLE REMINDERS



WARNING LIGHTSor Anti-lock braking

warning light

If the light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the anti-lock braking system is notfunctioning properly. Have the system checkedby a NISSAN dealer.

If a malfunction occurs in the system, the anti-lock function is turned off, but the regular brakingsystem continues to operate.

If the light comes on while you are driving,contact a NISSAN dealer for repair.

or Brake warning light

This light functions for both the parking brake andthe foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight comes on when the parking brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition key is in the ON position, thelight warns of a low brake fluid level. If the lightcomes on while the engine is running with theparking brake not applied, stop the vehicle andperform the following:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluidas necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have thewarning system checked by a NISSANdealer.

WARNING

● Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the warning light is on. Driv-ing could be dangerous. If you judge itto be safe, drive carefully to the nearestservice station for repairs. Otherwise,have your vehicle towed because driv-ing it could be dangerous.

● Pressing the brake pedal with the en-gine stopped and/or a low brake fluidlevel may increase your stopping dis-tance and braking will require greaterpedal effort as well as pedal travel.

● If the brake fluid level is below theMINIMUM or MIN mark on the brakefluid reservoir, do not drive until thebrake system has been checked at aNISSAN dealer.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is running,it may indicate the charging system is not func-tioning properly. Turn the engine off and checkthe generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSANdealer immediately.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving if the generatorbelt is loose, broken or missing.

Door open warning light

This light comes on when any of the doors are notclosed securely while the ignition key is in the ONposition.

Engine oil pressure warninglight

This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If thelight flickers or comes on during normal driving,pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engineimmediately and call a NISSAN dealer or otherauthorized repair shop.



The engine oil pressure warning light is notdesigned to indicate a low oil level. Use thedipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section ofthis manual.

CAUTION

Running the engine with the engine oilpressure warning light on could cause se-rious damage to the engine almost imme-diately. Such damage is not covered bywarranty. Turn off the engine as soon as itis safe to do so.

Intelligent Key system warninglight

The Intelligent Key system warning light illumi-nates green when the ignition switch can beturned. The Intelligent Key system warning lightilluminates red when the ignition switch cannotbe turned.The Intelligent Key system warning light blinksred if the Intelligent Key is taken outside of thevehicle while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position.

● If the Intelligent Key system warning lightblinks, make sure of the location of the Intel-ligent Key as soon as possible. The Intelli-gent Key should be carried by the driverwhile operating the vehicle.

● The Intelligent Key system warning lightturns off about 10 seconds after the Intelli-gent Key is brought inside the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key system warning light blinksgreen indicating that the Intelligent Key battery isalmost discharged.

See “Intelligent Key system” in the “Pre-drivingchecks and adjustments” section.

Low fuel warning light

This light comes on when the fuel level in the fueltank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is conve-nient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches E(Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuelin the tank when the fuel gauge needlereaches E (Empty).

Low tire pressure warninglight

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire PressureMonitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tirepressure of all tires except the spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns of lowtire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is notfunctioning properly.

After the ignition switch is turned ON, this lightilluminates for about 1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning:

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pres-sure, the warning light will illuminate. If you selectthe tire pressure information in the display (if soequipped), the LOW PRESSURE warning mes-sage will be displayed. The tire pressure for eachtire will also be displayed.

When the low tire pressure warning light illumi-nates, you should stop and adjust the tire pres-sure to the recommended COLD tire pressureshown on the Tire and Loading Information labelto turn the light OFF.

For additional information, see “Tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving”section and in the “In case of emergency”section.

TPMS malfunction:

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the lowtire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-mately 1 minute when the ignition switch isturned ON. The light will remain on after the 1minute. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.

For additional information, see “Tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS)” in the “Starting anddriving” section.



WARNING

● If the light does not illuminate with theignition switch turned ON, have the ve-hicle checked by a NISSAN dealer assoon as possible.

● If the light illuminates while driving,avoid sudden steering maneuvers orabrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,pull off the road to a safe location andstop the vehicle as soon as possible.Serious vehicle damage could occurand may lead to an accident and couldresult in serious personal injury. Checkthe tire pressure for all four tires. Adjustthe tire pressure to the recommendedCOLD tire pressure shown on the Tireand Loading Information label to turnthe low tire pressure warning light OFF.If the light still illuminates while drivingafter adjusting the tire pressure, a tiremay be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-place it with a spare tire as soon aspossible.

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the TPMS will not functionand the low tire pressure warning lightwill flash. Contact your NISSAN dealeras soon as possible for tire replacementand/or system resetting.

● Replacing tires with those not originallyspecified by NISSAN could affect theproper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

● The TPMS is not a substitute for theregular tire pressure check. Be sure tocheck the tire pressure regularly.

● If the vehicle is being driven at speedsof less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), theTPMS may not operate correctly.

● Be sure to install the specified size oftires to the 4 wheels correctly.

Low windshield washer fluidwarning light

This light comes on when the windshield washerfluid is at a low level. Add windshield washer fluidas necessary. See “Window washer fluid” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

P position selecting warninglight

The light blinks red and warning buzzer beepswhen the selector lever is not in the P positionand you are outside the vehicle with the Intelli-gent Key.

When the warning light blinks, move the selectorlever to the P position and return the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position.

Seat belt warning light andchime

The light and chime remind you to fasten yourseat belts. The light illuminates whenever theignition key is turned to the ON or START positionand remains illuminated until the driver’s seat beltis fastened. At the same time, the chime soundsfor about 6 seconds unless the driver’s seat beltis securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illuminate ifthe front passenger’s seat belt is not fastenedwhen the front passenger’s seat is occupied . For7 seconds after the ignition switch is in the ONposition, the system does not activate the warn-ing light for the front passenger.

Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seatbelts and supplemental restraint system” sectionfor precautions on seat belt usage.



Supplemental air bag warninglight

When the ignition key is in the ON or STARTposition, the supplemental air bag warning lightilluminates for about 7 seconds and then turnsoff. This means the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, thesupplemental front air bags, supplemental sideair bags, curtain side-impact air bags, and pre-tensioner seat belt systems need servicing andyour vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:

● The supplemental air bag warning light re-mains on after approximately 7 seconds.

● The supplemental air bag warning lightflashes intermittently.

● The supplemental air bag warning light doesnot come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supplementalrestraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-tensioner seat belts may not function properly.For additional details see “Supplemental restraintsystem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning lightis on, it could mean that the supplementalfront air bag, supplemental side air bag,curtain side-impact air bag systems (if soequipped) and/or pre-tensioner seat beltsystems will not operate in an accident. Tohelp avoid injury to yourself or others,have your vehicle checked by a NISSANdealer as soon as possible.

Trunk lid open warning light

This light comes on when the trunk lid is notsecurely closed while the ignition key is in the ONposition.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) indicatorlight

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the lightcomes on for 2 seconds.

Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) positionindicator light

When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-tion, this indicator light shows the CVT selectorlever position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Cruise main switch indicatorlight

The light comes on when the cruise control mainswitch is pushed. The light goes out when themain switch is pushed again. When the cruisemain switch indicator light comes on, the cruisecontrol system is operational.

Cruise set switch indicatorlight

The light comes on while the vehicle speed iscontrolled by the cruise control system. If the lightblinks while the engine is running, it may indicatethe cruise control system is not functioning prop-erly. Have the system checked by a NISSANdealer.



Front passenger air bagstatus light

The front passenger air bag status light ( )will be lit and the passenger front air bag will beOFF depending on how the front passenger seatis being used.

For front passenger air bag status light operation,see “Front passenger air bag and status light” inthe “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplementalrestraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light(Blue)

This blue light comes on when the headlight highbeams are on and goes out when the low beamsare selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes onwhen the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction indicator light(MIL)

If the malfunction indicator light comes on steadyor blinks while the engine is running, it may indi-cate a potential emission control and/or CVTmalfunction.

The malfunction indicator light may also come onsteady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or ifthe vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly,and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light shouldturn off if no other potential emission controlsystem malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for 20seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds whenthe engine is not running, it indicates that thevehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

Operation

The malfunction indicator light will come on inone of two ways:

● Malfunction indicator light on steady — Anemission control system and/or CVT mal-function has been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap. If the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap and con-tinue to drive the vehicle. The lightshould turn off after a few driving trips. Ifthe light does not turn off after a fewdriving trips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

● Malfunction indicator light blinking — An en-gine misfire has been detected which maydamage the emission control system. To re-duce or avoid emission control system dam-age:

– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH(72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of cargobeing hauled or towed.

The malfunction indicator light may stop blinkingand come on steady. Have the vehicle inspectedby a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to haveyour vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without hav-ing the emission control system checkedand repaired as necessary could lead topoor driveability, reduced fuel economy,and possible damage to the emission con-trol system.



Slip indicator light (if soequipped)

This indicator light will blink when the tractioncontrol system is limiting wheel spin. Slipperyroad conditions may exist if the slip indicatorblinks on. If this happens, adjust your drivingaccordingly.

The slip indicator light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the system isoperational. If the light does not come on or doesnot go off, have the traction control systemchecked by a NISSAN dealer.

Traction control system offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the tractioncontrol off switch is pushed to OFF. This indi-cates the traction control system is not operating.

Push the traction control off switch again or re-start the engine and the system will operate nor-mally. See “Traction control system (TCS)” in the“Starting and driving” section of this manual.

The traction control light also comes on when youturn the ignition key to the ON position. The lightwill turn off after about 2 seconds if the tractioncontrol system (TCS) is operational. If the lightstays on or comes on along with the SLIP indica-

tor light while you are driving, have the tractioncontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the traction control system is operating,you might feel slight vibration or hear the systemworking when starting the vehicle or accelerat-ing, but this is normal.

Turn signal/hazard indicatorlights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn signalswitch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turnedon.

Vehicle dynamic control offindicator light (if so equipped)

This indicator light comes on when the vehicledynamic control off switch is pushed to OFF. Thisindicates the vehicle dynamic control system isnot operating.

Push the vehicle dynamic control off switch againor restart the engine and the system will operatenormally. See “Vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system” in the “Starting and driving” section ofthis manual.

The vehicle dynamic control light also comes onwhen you turn the ignition key to the ON position.The light will turn off after about 2 seconds if the

system is operational. If the light stays on orcomes on along with the SLIP indicator lightwhile you are driving, have the vehicle dynamiccontrol system checked by a NISSAN dealer.

While the vehicle dynamic control system is op-erating, you might feel slight vibration or hear thesystem working when starting the vehicle or ac-celerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.When a disc brake pad requires replacement, itmakes a high pitched scraping sound when thevehicle is in motion, whether or not the brakepedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked assoon as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Key reminder chime

A chime sounds if the driver’s door is openedwhile the key is left in the ignition switch. Removethe key and take it with you when leaving thevehicle.

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch in the OFF position, achime sounds when the driver’s door is opened ifthe headlights or parking lights are on.



Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-ing the vehicle.

Intelligent Key door buzzerThe Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if any oneof the following improper operations is found.

● The Intelligent Key is left inside the vehiclewhen locking the doors.

● Any doors are not closed securely whenlocking the doors.

When the buzzer sounds, be sure to check boththe vehicle and the Intelligent Key. See “Intelli-gent Key system” in the “Pre-driving checks andadjustments” section.

Your vehicle has two types of security systems:

● Vehicle security system

● NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEMThe vehicle security system provides visual andaudible alarm signals if someone opens the doorsor trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,however, a motion detection type system thatactivates when a vehicle is moved or when avibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannotprevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior orexterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-

ways secure your vehicle even if parking for abrief period. Never leave your keys in the ignition,and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Beaware of your surroundings, and park in secure,well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protection, suchas component locks, identification markers, andtracking systems, are available at auto supplystores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealermay also offer such equipment. Check with yourinsurance company to see if you may be eligiblefor discounts for various theft protection features.

How to arm the vehicle securitysystem

1. Close all windows. (The system can bearmed even if the windows are open.)

2. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

3. Close the trunk lid and all doors. Lock alldoors. The doors can be locked with:

● the power door lock switch (if the door isopened, locked and then closed).

● the key (mechanical).

● any request switch.

● the Intelligent Key.

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS



Intelligent Key operation:

● Push the button. All doors lock.The hazard lights flash twice and the hornbeeps once to indicate all doors arelocked.

● When the button is pushed withall doors locked, the hazard lights flashtwice and the horn beeps once as a re-minder that the doors are already locked.

The horn may or may not beep. Refer to“Silencing the horn beep feature” (vehicleswithout navigation system) in the “Pre-driving check and adjustments” section or“Vehicle electronic systems” (vehicles withnavigation system) in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner, audio and phone sys-tems” section later in this manual.

4. Confirm that the security indicator lightcomes on. The security light stays on forabout 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-onds the vehicle security system automati-cally shifts into the armed phase. Thesecurity light begins to flash once every 3seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-armtime period, the driver’s door is unlocked bythe key, a request switch or the IntelligentKey, or if the ignition key is turned to ACC orON, the system will not arm.

● If the key is turned slowly when lockingthe driver’s door, the system may notarm. Furthermore, if the key is turnedbeyond the vertical position toward theunlock position to remove the key, thesystem may be disarmed when the keyis removed. If the indicator light fails toglow for 30 seconds, unlock the dooronce and lock it again.

● Even when the driver and/or passen-gers are in the vehicle, the system willarm with all doors and trunk lid closedand locked with the ignition key in theOFF position.

Vehicle security system activationThe vehicle security system will give the followingalarm:

● The headlights blink and the horn soundsintermittently.

● The alarm automatically turns off after ap-proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarmreactivates if the vehicle is tampered withagain. The alarm can be shut off by unlockingthe driver’s door with the key, a requestswitch or by pressing the button onthe Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

● opening the door or trunk lid without usingthe key, a request switch or the IntelligentKey (even if the door is unlocked by using theinside lock knob or the power door lockswitch)

● opening the trunk lid by operating the interiortrunk lid release.

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’sdoor with the key, a request switch or by pressingthe button on the Intelligent Key.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of aregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.



2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.

Statement related to Section 15 of FCCRules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-tem (CONT ASSY — IMMOBILIZER, ANTASSY — IMMOBILIZER)

This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the follow-ing two conditions;

(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion of the device.

CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULDVOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-ATE THE EQUIPMENT.

Security indicator lightThe security indicator light s1 is located on theinstrument panel near the windshield.

The security indicator light blinks whenever theignition switch is in the LOCK position with thekey removed from the ignition switch.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-functioning, the light will remain on while theignition key is in the ON position.

LIC0994



If the light still remains on and/or the en-gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer forNISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-vice as soon as possible. Please bring allkeys that you have when visiting yourNISSAN dealer for service.

SWITCH OPERATION

The windshield wiper and washer operates whenthe ignition switch is in the ON position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper at thefollowing speed:

s1 Intermittent — intermittent operation can beadjusted by turning the knob toward sA(Slower) or sB (Faster). Also, the intermit-tent operation speed varies in accordancewith the vehicle speed. (For example, whenthe vehicle speed is high, the intermittentoperation speed will be faster.)

NOTE:

You can turn on or turn off the drivingspeed dependent intermittent wiper func-tion for vehicles with navigation system.Refer to “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au-dio and phone systems”section later in thismanual.

s2 Low — continuous low speed operation

s3 High — continuous high speed operation

Push the lever up s4 to have one sweep opera-tion of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you s5 to operate thewasher. The wiper will also operate several times.

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer solu-tion may freeze on the windshield andobscure your vision which may lead to anaccident. Warm the windshield with thedefroster before you wash the windshield.

WIC0854

WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH



CAUTION

● Do not operate the washer continu-ously for more than 30 seconds.

● Do not operate the washer if the reser-voir tank is empty.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

To defrost the rear window glass and outsidemirrors (if so equipped), start the engine andpush the rear window defroster switch on. Therear window defroster indicator light on theswitch comes on. Push the switch again to turnthe defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically turns offafter approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch or dam-age the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top few rows of wires on the rear win-dow are not part of the rear window de-froster system. These wires make up theantenna for the audio system.

WIC0995

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDEMIRROR (if so equipped)DEFROSTER SWITCH



XENON HEADLIGHTS (if soequipped)

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

● When xenon headlights are on, theyproduce a high voltage. To prevent anelectric shock, never attempt to modifyor disassemble. Always have your xe-non headlights replaced at a NISSANdealer.

● Xenon headlights provide considerablymore light than conventional head-lights. If they are not correctly aimed,they might temporarily blind an oncom-ing driver or the driver ahead of you andcause a serious accident. If headlightsare not aimed correctly, immediatelytake your vehicle to a NISSAN dealerand have the headlights adjustedcorrectly.

When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, itsbrightness or color varies slightly. However, thecolor and brightness will soon stabilize.

● The life of xenon headlights will beshortened by frequent on-off opera-tion. It is generally desirable not to turnoff the headlights for short intervals(for example, when the vehicle stops ata traffic signal). Even when the daytimerunning lights are active (Canada only),the xenon headlights do not turn on.This way the life of the xenon head-lights is not reduced.

● If the xenon headlight bulb is close toburning out, the brightness will drasti-cally decrease, the light will start blink-ing, or the color of the light will be-come reddish. If one or more of theabove signs appear, contact a NISSANdealer.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

s1 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the front parking, tail, license plate andinstrument panel lights come on.

s2 When turning the switch to the posi-tion, the headlights come on and all the otherlights remain on.

LIC0560

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNALSWITCH



CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights to beset so they turn on and off automatically. Theautolight system can:

● Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,license plate and instrument panel lights au-tomatically when it is dark.

● Turn off all the lights when it is light.

● Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds afteryou turn the key to OFF and all doors areclosed.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and thetime delay for autolight shutoff can be ad-justed for vehicles with navigation system.See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, au-dio and phone systems”section later in thismanual.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-tion s1 .

2. Turn the ignition key to ON.

3. The autolight system automatically turns theheadlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF and adoor is opened and left open, the headlightsremain ON for 5 minutes. If another door isopened during the 5 minutes, then the 5 minutetimer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch tothe OFF, or position.

LIC0561



Be sure you do not put anything on top ofthe autolight sensor s1 located in the topside of the instrument panel. The autolightsensor controls the autolight; if it is cov-ered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it isdark out and the headlights will illuminate.If this occurs while parked with the engineoff and the key in the ON position, yourvehicle’s battery could become discharged.

Headlight beam select

s1 To select the high beam function, push thelever forward. The high beam lights come onand the light illuminates.

s2 Pull the lever back to select the low beam.

s3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes theheadlight high beams on and off.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is turned OFF while theheadlight switch is in the or posi-tion, the headlights will turn off after 5 minutes.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature au-tomatically turns off the headlights after aperiod of time, you should turn the head-light switch to the OFF position when theengine is not running to avoid dischargingthe vehicle battery.

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM(Canada only)

The daytime running lights automatically illumi-nate when the engine is started with the parkingbrake released. The daytime running lights oper-ate with the headlight switch in the OFF positionor in the position. Turn the headlight switchto the AUTO or position for headlight illu-mination when driving at night.

If the parking brake is applied before the engine isstarted, the daytime running lights do not illumi-nate. The daytime running lights illuminate whenthe parking brake is released. The daytime run-ning lights will remain on until the ignition switchis turned off.

WIC0996 LIC0562



WARNING

When the daytime running light system isactive, tail lights on your vehicle are noton. It is necessary at dusk to turn on yourheadlights. Failure to do so could causean accident injuring yourself and others.

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESSCONTROLThe instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-tion switch is in ON position.

The instrument brightness control operates whenthe headlight control switch is in theAUTO, or position.

Turn the control to adjust the brightness of instru-ment panel lights when driving at night.

The instrument brightness control will not adjustthe brightness when the headlights or parkinglights are off.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

s1 Move the lever up or down to signal theturning direction. When the turn is com-pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.

Lane change signal

s2 To signal a lane change, move the lever up ordown to the point where the indicator lightbegins to flash, but the lever does not latch.

LIC0392 LIC0563



FOG LIGHT SWITCHTo turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switchto the position, then turn the fog lightswitch to the position.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switchin the AUTO position, the headlights must be on,then turn the fog light switch to the posi-tion.

To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switchto the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low beamsselected for the fog lights to operate. The foglights automatically turn off when the high beamheadlights are selected.

CORNERING LIGHTThe cornering light provides additional illumina-tion toward the turning direction. The corneringlight will illuminate on the turning direction sidewhen a turn is signaled with the headlights on.

LIC0393 AIC0102



Push the switch on to warn other drivers whenyou must stop or park under emergency condi-tions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

● If stopping for an emergency, be sure tomove the vehicle well off the road.

● Do not use the hazard warning flasherswhile moving on the highway unlessunusual circumstances force you todrive so slowly that your vehicle mightbecome a hazard to other traffic.

● Turn signals do not work when the haz-ard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition switchin any position.

Some state laws may prohibit the use ofthe hazard warning flasher switch whiledriving.

To sound the horn, push the center pad area ofthe steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing socould affect proper operation of thesupplemental front air bag system. Tam-pering with the supplemental front air bagsystem may result in serious personalinjury.

LIC0394 LIC0395

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERSWITCH

HORN



The front and rear seats are warmed by built-inheaters (if so equipped). The switches are lo-cated on the center consoles.

1. Start the engine.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch, asdesired. The indicator light in the switch willilluminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermostat,automatically turning the heater on and off.The indicator light will remain on as long asthe switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before youleave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switchoff.

CAUTION

● Do not use the seat heater for extendedperiods or when no one is using theseat.

● Do not put anything on the seat whichinsulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seatmay become overheated.

● Do not place anything hard or heavy onthe seat or pierce it with a pin or similarobject. This may result in damage to theheater.

● Any liquid spilled on the heated seatshould be removed immediately with adry cloth.

● When cleaning the seat, never usegasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-lar materials.

● If any abnormalities are found or theheated seat does not operate, turn theswitch off and have the system checkedby your NISSAN dealer.

● The battery could run down if the seatheater is operated while the engine isnot running.

WIC0905

HEATED SEATS (if so equipped)



The heated steering wheel system is designed tooperate only when the surface temperature of thesteering wheel is below approximately 68°F(20°C).

The heated steering wheel switch is located onthe front of the console box.

Push the heated steering wheel switch to warmthe steering wheel after the engine starts. Theindicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering wheel isbelow 68°F (20°C), the system will heat thesteering wheel to approximately 86°F (30°C),then turn off automatically.

Push the switch again to turn the heated steeringoff manually. The indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steeringwheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the switchis turned on, the system will not heat thesteering wheel. This is not a malfunction.

The vehicle should be driven with the Traction Con-trol System (TCS) on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the TCSreduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin.The engine speed will be reduced even if theaccelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximumengine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,turn the TCS off.

To turn off the TCS, push the TCS OFF switch.The indicator will come on.

Push the “TCS OFF” switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “Tractioncontrol system (TCS)” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section.

LIC0421 LIC0451

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (if soequipped)

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)



The vehicle should be driven with the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-ing conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDCsystem reduces the engine output to reducewheel spin. The engine speed will be reducedeven if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. Ifmaximum engine power is needed to free a stuckvehicle, turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFFswitch. The indicator will come on.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart theengine to turn ON the system. See “Vehicle dy-namic control (VDC) system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WARNING

The rear sonar system is a conveniencebut it is not a substitute for proper back-ing. Always turn and check that it is safe todo so before backing up. Always back upslowly.

The rear sonar system is active when the ignitionis in the ON position and the shift selector lever isin R (Reverse).

When sensors detect obstacles within 6 ft (1.8m) of the rear bumper, a beeping tone is emitted.

The rear sonar system can be disabled by push-ing the OFF switch. When the system is disabled,

the indicator light on the switch will illuminate.Push the switch again to enable the system. Theindicator light will go off.

The system will automatically reset the next timethe ignition switch is turned on.

See “Rear sonar system” in the “Starting anddriving” section.

WIC0534 LIC0471

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)OFF SWITCH (if so equipped)

REAR SONAR SYSTEM OFF SWITCH(if so equipped)



The power outlets are for powering electricalaccessories such as cellular telephones. Theyare rated at 12 Volt, 120 W (10A) maximum.

The power outlet located in the front center con-sole is powered directly by the vehicle battery.The other outlets are powered only when theignition key is in the ACC or ON position.

CAUTION

● The outlet and plug may be hot duringor immediately after use.

● The power outlets are not designed foruse with a cigarette lighter.

● Do not use with accessories that ex-ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.Do not use double adapters or morethan one electrical accessory.

● Use power outlets with the engine run-ning to avoid discharging the vehiclebattery.

● Avoid using power outlets when the airconditioner, headlights or rear windowdefroster is on.

● Before inserting or disconnecting aplug, be sure the electrical accessorybeing used is turned OFF.

● Push the plug in as far as it will go. Ifgood contact is not made, the plug mayoverheat or the internal temperaturefuse may open.

● When not in use, be sure to close thecap. Do not allow water to contact theoutlet.

Instrument panelLIC0997

Front center consoleWIC1010

POWER OUTLET



MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETSThe seatback pockets are located on the back ofthe driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pocketscan be used to store maps.

Rear center console (if so equipped)LIC0397 LIC0804 LIC0016

STORAGE



SUNGLASSES HOLDER

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed whiledriving to prevent an accident.

CAUTION

● Do not use for anything other thansunglasses.

● Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-glasses holder while parking in directsunlight. The heat may damage thesunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS

CAUTION

● Avoid abrupt starting and braking whenthe cup holder is being used to preventspilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, itcan scald you or your passenger.

● Use only soft cups in the cup holder.Hard objects can injure you in anaccident.

To open the front cup holders, push the cupholder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid andpush down until it clicks in place.

WIC0998Front

WIC1011



The plastic cup insert may be removed for clean-ing.

The rear cup holders are located in the fold-downarmrest in the rear seat back or in the rear centerconsole.

To open the cup holders on the rear fold-downarmrest, lift the cup holder lid. To close, lower thelid.

To open the cup holders on the rear center con-sole, push the button. The cup holder lid willopen. To close, gently push the lid toward thecenter.

Rear — Type ALIC0423

Rear — Type BLIC0402



GLOVE BOXOpen the glove box by pulling the handle. Use themechanical key when locking s1 or unlocking s2the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving tohelp prevent injury in an accident or asudden stop.

CONSOLE BOX

ArmrestInsert your finger into to the recess s1 and slidethe armrest forward to the desired position.

Console box storagePull up on the latch to open the console box.Remove the inside tray to store a large object.

The console box may be used for storage ofcellular phones. You can route a cord through theaccess notch s1 to the power outlet inside theconsole box.

LIC0403 LIC0999 LIC1000



REAR CENTER CONSOLE (if soequipped)Pull up on the lever to open the console box.

The light inside the rear center console box maybe turned on s1 and off s2 with the switch.

COVERED STORAGE BOXPush the bottom center of the lid to open.

LIC0426 WIC0697 LIC1001



GROCERY HOOKSThe grocery hooks are located in the trunk andcan be used to hang a standard size plasticgrocery bag.

CAUTION

Do not apply a total load of more than 20lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.

CARGO NETS

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo with ropes orstraps to help prevent it from sliding orshifting. In a sudden stop or collision,unsecured cargo could cause personalinjury.

● Be sure to secure all four hooks into theretainers. The cargo restrained in thenet must not exceed 30 lbs. (13.6 kg) orthe net may not stay secured.

The cargo nets (right, center and left) help keeppackages in the cargo area from moving aroundwhile the vehicle is in motion.

LIC0748 WIC0757



To install a cargo net, attach the net to the retain-ers.

To remove a cargo net, detach the net from theretainers.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

● Make sure that all passengers havetheir hands, etc. inside the vehicle whileit is in motion and before closing thewindows. Use the window lock switchto prevent unexpected use of the powerwindows.

● Do not leave children unattended insidethe vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-tivate switches or controls and becometrapped in a window. Unattended chil-dren could become involved in seriousaccidents.

The power windows operate when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position, or for about 45seconds after the ignition switch is turned to theOFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the windows is canceled.

1. Power door lock switch2. Window lock button3. Front passenger side4. Right rear passenger side5. Left rear passenger side6. Driver side automatic switchDriver’s side power window switchThe driver’s side control panel is equipped withswitches to open or close all of the windows.

To open a window, push the switch and hold itdown. To close a window, pull the switch andhold it up. To stop the opening or closing functionat any time, simply release the switch.

LIC0802 LIC0407

WINDOWS



Front passenger’s power windowswitchThe passenger’s window switch operates onlythe corresponding passenger’s window. To openthe window, push the switch and hold it down s1 .To close the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Rear power window switchThe rear power window switches open or closeonly the corresponding windows. To open thewindow, push the switch and hold it down s1 . Toclose the window, pull the switch up s2 .

Locking passengers’ windowsWhen the window lock button is depressed, onlythe driver’s side window can be opened orclosed. Push it again to cancel the window lockfunction.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with automaticoperation, press the window switch down (onlydriver’s side shown) to the second detent andrelease it; it need not be held. The window auto-matically opens all the way. To stop the window,lift the switch up while the window is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with automaticoperation, pull the switch up to the second detentand release it; it need not be held.

Auto-reverse functionThe auto-reverse function can be activated whena window is closed by automatic operation.

LIC0408 LIC0409 LIC0410



Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto-reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the window oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the window.

If the control unit detects something caught in awindow equipped with automatic operation as itis closing, the window will be immediately low-ered.

Open or close the SkyView roof shade by slidingit from side to side.

AUTOMATIC SUNROOF

The sunroof will only operate when the ignitionkey is in the ON position. The automatic sunroofis operational for about 45 seconds, even if theignition key is turned to the ACC or OFF position.If the driver’s door or the front passenger’s dooris opened during this period of about 45 sec-onds, power to the sunroof is canceled.

Sliding the sunroof

To open the roof, slide the switch to the OPENposition s1 . When the roof is tilted up, it willautomatically tilt down and then open.

LIC0411 WIC0906

SKYVIEW™ GLASS-PANELED ROOF SUNROOF (if so equipped)



To close the roof, slide the switch to the CLOSEposition s2 .

The position of the sliding roof lid can be chosenby the position of the sliding switch.

To fully open or close the roof, completely movethe switch to the open or closed position.

Tilting the sunroof

To tilt the sunroof up, push the tilt switch to theUP position s3 . When the roof is open, it willautomatically close and then tilt up. To tilt thesunroof down, push the tilt switch to the DOWNposition s4 .

Restarting the sunroof sliding switch

The sliding switch will become inoperable afterthe battery terminal is disconnected, the electri-cal supply interrupted and/or some abnormalitydetected. Use the following reset procedure toreturn sunroof operation to normal.

1. If the sunroof lid is open, push the tiltingswitch repeatedly toward the DOWN posi-tion to fully close the lid.

2. Push and hold the tilting switch for morethan 2 seconds toward the DOWN positionto reestablish the lid’s home position.

The sunroof should now operate normally.

Auto reverse function (when closing ortilting down the sunroof)

The auto reverse function can be activated whenthe sunroof is closed or tilted down by automaticoperation when the ignition key is in the ONposition or for about 45 seconds after the ignitionkey is turned to the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or drivingconditions, the auto reverse function maybe activated if an impact or load similar tosomething being caught in the sunroof oc-curs.

WARNING

There are some small distances immedi-ately before the closed position whichcannot be detected. Make sure that allpassengers have their hands, etc., insidethe vehicle before closing the sunroof.

When closing:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it moves to the front, the sunroof willimmediately open backward.

When tilting down:

If the control unit detects something caught in thesunroof as it tilts down, the sunroof will immedi-ately tilt up.

If the auto reverse function malfunctions and re-peats opening or tilting up the sunroof, keeppushing the tilt down switch within 5 secondsafter it happens; the sunroof will fully close gradu-ally. Make sure nothing is caught in the sunroof.

WARNING

● In an accident you could be thrown fromthe vehicle through an open sunroof.Always use seat belts and childrestraints.

● Do not allow anyone to stand up orextend any portion of their body out ofthe sunroof opening while the vehicle isin motion or while the sunroof isclosing.

CAUTION

● Remove water drops, snow, ice or sandfrom the sunroof before opening.

● Do not place heavy objects on the sun-roof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-ward or backward.



If the sunroof does not closeHave your NISSAN dealer check and repair thesunroof.

CAUTION

● To avoid personal injury, keep yourhands, fingers and head away from thesun shade arm, arm rail and screen inletport.

● Do not allow children near the rear sunshade system. They could be injured.

● Do not place objects on or near the rearsun shade. This could cause improperoperation or damage it.

● Do not pull or push the rear sun shade.This could cause improper operation ordamage it.

LIC0418

REAR SUN SHADE (if so equipped)



1. Arm rail2. Screen3. Caution label4. Sun shade armsThe rear sun shade operates when the ignitionkey is in the ACC or ON position.

The rear sun shade switches are located on thefront and rear center consoles.

To raise the screen, push the upper side of theswitch.

To lower the screen, push the lower side of theswitch.

The switch need not be held down.

CAUTION

● Do not place objects (such as newspa-pers, handkerchiefs, etc.) on the screeninlet port. Doing so may entangle theseobjects in the screen when it is extend-ing or retracting, causing improper op-eration or damage to the screen.

● Do not push the sun shade arm withyour hands, etc., as this may deform it.Improper operation or damage to thescreen may result.

● Do not hang any object on the arm railas this may result in improper operationor damage the screen.

● Do not forcefully pull the screen. Doingso may elongate the screen. Improperoperation or damage to the screen mayresult.

The interior light has a three-position switch andoperates regardless of ignition switch position.

● When the switch is in the ON position s1 ,the interior light illuminates, regardless ofdoor position. The light will go off after 30minutes unless the ignition key is in the ACCor ON position.

● When the switch is in the center DOORposition s2 , the front and rear personallights will illuminate under the following con-ditions:

– Driver’s door is unlocked while the igni-tion key is removed from the key cylinder.

LIC0907

INTERIOR LIGHT



Lights remain on for a maximum of 30seconds.

– Driver’s door is opened.Lights remain on for a maximum of 30seconds after driver’s door is closed.

– Ignition key is removed from key cylinder.Lights remain on for a maximum of 30seconds.

The lights will go off when the ignition key is in theON position, or the driver’s door is closed andlocked.

The lights will also go off after 30 minutes whendoors are open.

● When the switch is in the OFF position s3 ,the interior light does not illuminate, regard-less of door position.

NOTE:

The foot well and door step lights illumi-nate when the driver and passenger doorsare opened regardless of the interior lightswitch position. These lights will turn offautomatically after 30 minutes while doorsare open to prevent the battery from be-coming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

FRONTTo turn the map lights on, press the switches. Toturn them off, press the switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of timewith the engine stopped. This could resultin a discharged battery.

LIC0908

PERSONAL LIGHTS



Console lightThe console light s1 will turn on whenever theparking lights or headlights are illuminated.

The console light brightness can be adjustedwith the illumination brightness control.

REARTo turn on both personal reading lights, press theswitch to the position s1 . To turn the lightsoff, return the switch to the center position.

To turn on a single personal reading light, pressthe switch to the position s2 . To turn asingle personal reading light off, return the switchto the center position.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.

The light will go off after about 30 minutes if thetrunk lid is left open, unless the ignition key is inthe ACC or ON position.

For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance anddo-it-yourself” section of this manual.

LIC0909 LIC0417

TRUNK LIGHT



The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver provides aconvenient way to consolidate the functions of upto three individual hand-held transmitters intoone built-in device.

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver:

● Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)devices such as garage doors, gates, homeand office lighting, entry door locks and se-curity systems.

● Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. Noseparate batteries are required. If the vehi-cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-nected, HomeLinkT will retain all program-ming.

Once the HomeLinkT Universal Transceiveris programmed, retain the original trans-mitter for future programming procedures(Example: new vehicle purchases). Uponsale of the vehicle, the programmedHomeLinkT Universal Transceiver buttonsshould be erased for security purposes. Foradditional information refer to “Program-ming HomeLinkT” later in this section.

WARNING

● Do not use the HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver with any garage dooropener that lacks safety stop and re-verse features as required by federalsafety standards. (These standards be-came effective for opener modelsmanufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-rage door opener which cannot detectan object in the path of a closing garagedoor and then automatically stop andreverse, does not meet current federalsafety standards. Using a garage dooropener without these features in-creases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

● During the programming procedureyour garage door or security gate willopen and close (if the transmitter iswithin range). Make sure that people orobjects are clear of the garage door,gate, etc. that you are programming.

● Your vehicle’s engine should be turnedoff while programming the HomeLinkTUniversal Transceiver.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT

1. To begin, press and hold the two outerHomeLinkT buttons (to clear the memory)until the indicator light s1 blinks (after 20seconds). Release both buttons.

2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface.

WIC0986

HOMELINKT UNIVERSALTRANSCEIVER



3. Using both hands, simultaneously press andhold both the HomeLinkT button you want toprogram and the hand-held transmitter but-ton.

DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 hasbeen completed.

4. Hold down both buttons until the indicatorlight on the HomeLinkT flashes, changingfrom a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashingblink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.When the indicator light flashes rapidly, bothbuttons may be released. The rapidly flash-ing light indicates successful programming.To activate the garage door or other pro-grammed device, press and hold the pro-grammed HomeLinkT button — releasingwhen the device begins to activate.

5. If the indicator light on the HomeLinkT blinksrapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,HomeLinkT has picked up a “rolling code”garage door opener signal. You will need toproceed with the next steps to train theHomeLinkT to complete the programmingwhich may require a ladder and another per-son for convenience.

6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-gram button located on the garage dooropener’s motor to activate the “trainingmode”. This button is usually located nearthe antenna wire that hangs down from themotor. If the wire originates from under alight lens, you will need to remove the lens toaccess the program button.

NOTE:

Once you have pressed and released theprogram button on the garage door open-er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, youhave 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.Use the help of a second person for conve-nience to assist when performing this step.

7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-ing the garage door opener program button,quickly and firmly press and release theHomeLinkT button you’ve just programmed.Press and release the HomeLinkT button upto 3 times to complete the training.

8. Your HomeLinkT button should now be pro-grammed. (To program the remainingHomeLinkT buttons for additional door orgate openers, follow steps 2-8 only.)

NOTE:

Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to“clear” all previously programmedHomeLinkT buttons.

If you have any questions or are having difficultyprogramming your HomeLinkT buttons, refer tothe HomeLinkT web site at: www.homelink.comor call 1-800-355-3515.

WIC0987



PROGRAMMING HOMELINKT FORCANADIAN CUSTOMERSPrior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-onds. To program your hand-held transmitter toHomeLinkT, continue to press and hold theHomeLinkT button (note steps 2 - 4 under “Pro-gramming HomeLinkT”) while you press and re-press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly(indicating successful programming).

NOTE:

When programming a garage door opener,etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-sible damage to the garage door openercomponents.

OPERATING THE HOMELINKTUNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVERThe HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver (once pro-grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-propriate programmed HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver button. The red indicator light willilluminate while the signal is being transmitted.

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-DIAGNOSISIf the HomeLinkT does not quickly learn the hand-held transmitter information:

● replace the hand-held transmitter batterieswith new batteries.

● position the hand-held transmitter with itsbattery area facing away from theHomeLinkT surface.

● press and hold both the HomeLinkT andhand-held transmitter buttons without inter-ruption.

● position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3inches (26 - 76 mm) away from theHomeLinkT surface. Hold the transmitter inthat position for up to 15 seconds. IfHomeLinkT is not programmed within thattime, try holding the transmitter in anotherposition – keeping the indicator light in viewat all times.

If you continue to have programming difficulties,please contact the NISSAN Consumer AffairsDepartment. The phone numbers are located inthe Foreword of this manual.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMEDINFORMATIONIndividual buttons cannot be cleared. However,to clear all programming, press and hold the twooutside buttons and release when the indicatorlight begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLEHOMELINKT BUTTONTo reprogram a HomeLinkT Universal Transceiverbutton, complete the following.

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkT but-ton. Do not release the button until step 4has been completed.

2. When the indicator light begins to flashslowly (after 20 seconds), position thehand-held transmitter 1 - 3 inches (26 - 76mm) away from the HomeLinkT surface.

3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitterbutton.

4. The HomeLinkT indicator light will flash, firstslowly and then rapidly. When the indicatorlight begins to flash rapidly, release bothbuttons.



The HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver button hasnow been reprogrammed. The new device canbe activated by pushing the HomeLinkT buttonthat was just programmed. This procedure willnot affect any other programmed HomeLinkTbuttons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLENIf your vehicle is stolen, you should change thecodes of any non-rolling code device that hasbeen programmed into HomeLinkT. Consult theOwner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-facturer or dealer of those devices for additionalinformation.

When your vehicle is recovered, you willneed to reprogram the HomeLinkT Univer-sal Transceiver with your new transmitterinformation.

FCC Notice:

This device complies with FCC rules part15. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference and (2) This de-vice must accept any interference that maybe received, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.

This transmitter has been tested and com-plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

DOC: ISTC 1763K1313

FCC I.D. CV2V67690




MEMO

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Intelligent Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Nissan vehicle immobilizer system keys . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Locking with inside lock knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Intelligent Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9How to use the remote keyless entryfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13Warning lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20

Trunk lid release switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Secondary trunk lid release(4-seat model only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Opener operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Tilting telescopic steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Automatic operation (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

Automatic drive positioner (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Memory storage function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Entry/exit function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32System operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33


1. Two Intelligent Keys2. Mechanical keys with built-in transpon-

der chip (inside Intelligent Keys)3. Key number plate

INTELLIGENT KEYS

Your vehicle can only be driven with the IntelligentKeys which are registered to your vehicle’s Intel-ligent Key system components and NISSAN Ve-hicle Immobilizer System components. As manyas 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered and usedwith one vehicle. The new keys must be regis-tered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with theIntelligent Key system and NISSAN Vehicle Im-mobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the reg-

istration process requires erasing all memory inthe Intelligent Key components when registeringnew keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys thatyou have to the NISSAN dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your keys.Record the key number and keep it in a safe place(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you loseyour keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates byusing the key number. NISSAN does not recordkey numbers so it is very important to keep trackof your key number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you havelost all keys and do not have one to duplicatefrom. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealercan duplicate it.

CAUTION

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

WPD0363

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments


Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key,which can be used in case of a discharged bat-tery.

To remove the mechanical key, release the lockknob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it intothe Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns tothe lock position.

The mechanical key can be used for operation inthe same way as an ordinary key.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key installedin the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-offWhen you have to leave a key with a valet, givethem the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-chanical key with you to protect your belongings.

To prevent the glove box and the trunk from beingopened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-dures below.

1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFFposition.

2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

3. Lock the glove box and the trunk pass-through with the mechanical key.

4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet andkeep the mechanical key with you.

See “Trunk lid” later in this section, “Storage” inthe “Instruments and controls” section and“Seats” in the “Safety — seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the masterkeys which are registered to the NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System components in your vehicle.These keys have a transponder chip in the keyhead.

The master key can be used for all the locks.

To protect belongings when you leave a key withsomeone, give them the Intelligent Key only, notthe mechanical key.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is notnecessary when you need extra NISSAN VehicleImmobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-cate your existing key. As many as four NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys can be usedwith one vehicle. You should bring all NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have toyour NISSAN dealer for registration. This is be-cause the registration process will erase thememory of all key codes previously registeredinto the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System.After the registration process, these componentswill only recognize keys coded into the NISSANVehicle Immobilizer System during registration.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3


Any key that is not given to your dealer at the timeof registration will no longer be able to start yourvehicle.

Do not allow the immobilizer system key, whichcontains an electrical transponder, to come intocontact with salt water. This could affect systemfunction.

WARNING

● Always have the doors locked whiledriving. Along with the use of seat belts,this provides greater safety in the eventof an accident by helping to preventpersons from being thrown from thevehicle. This also helps keep childrenand others from unintentionally open-ing the doors, and will help keep outintruders.

● Before opening any door, always lookfor and avoid oncoming traffic.


LOCKING WITH KEY

The power door lock system allows you to lock orunlock all doors at the same time.

Turning the key toward the front s1 of the vehiclelocks all doors.

Turning the key one time toward the rear s2 of thevehicle unlocks that door. From that position,returning the key to neutral s3 (where the key canonly be removed and inserted) and turning ittoward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocksall doors s4 .

Driver’s sideLPD0181

DOORS



Opening and closing windowsThe driver’s door key operation allows you toopen and close windows equipped with auto-matic operation at the same time.

● To open the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey toward the rear of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is unlocked.

● To close the windows, turn the driver’s doorkey to the front of the vehicle for longerthan 1 second after the door is locked.

Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCKKNOBTo lock the door without the key, move the insidelock knob to the lock position s1 , then close thedoor.

To unlock the door without the key, move theinside lock knob to the unlock position s2 .

LOCKING WITH POWER DOORLOCK SWITCHTo lock all the doors without a key, push the doorlock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side), tothe lock position s1 . When locking the door thisway, be certain not to leave the key inside thevehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push thedoor lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’sside) to the unlock position s2 .

Inside lockLPD0182

Door lock switch — Type ALPD0183



Lockout protectionWhen the power door lock switch (driver’s orfront passenger’s side) is moved to the lockposition with the key in the ignition and any dooropen, all doors will lock and then unlock auto-matically. This helps to prevent the keys frombeing accidently locked inside the vehicle.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCKChild safety locks help prevent the rear doorsfrom being opened accidentally, especially whensmall children are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on theedge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the lock position, thedoor can be opened only from the outside.

Door lock switch — Type BWPD0381 APD1010



WARNING

Radio waves could adversely affect elec-tric medical equipment. Those who use apacemaker should contact the electricmedical equipment manufacturer for thepossible influences before use.

The Intelligent Key system can operate all thedoor locks using the remote controller function orpushing the request switch on the vehicle withouttaking the key out from a pocket or purse. Theoperating environment and/or conditions may af-fect the Intelligent Key system operation.

Be sure to read the following before using theIntelligent Key system.

CAUTION

● Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key withyou when operating the vehicle.

● Never leave the Intelligent Key in thevehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicating withthe vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-ligent Key system transmits weak radio waves.Environmental conditions may interfere with theoperation of the Intelligent Key system under thefollowing operating conditions.

● When operating near a location wherestrong radio waves are transmitted, such asa TV tower, power station and broadcastingstation.

● When in possession of wireless equipment,such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,and CB radio.

● When the Intelligent Key is in contact with orcovered by metallic materials.

● When any type of radio wave remote controlis used nearby.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed near anelectric appliance such as a personal com-puter.

● When the vehicle is parked near a parkingmeter.

In such cases, correct the operating conditionsbefore using the Intelligent Key function or usethe mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies dependingon the operating conditions, the battery’s life isapproximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-charged, replace it with a new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blinkgreen for about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turned to the ON position.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receivingradio waves, if the key is left near equipmentwhich transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-tery life may become shorter.

For information regarding replacement of a bat-tery, see “Battery” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registeredand used with one vehicle. For information aboutthe purchase and use of additional IntelligentKeys, contact a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

● Do not allow the Intelligent Key, whichcontains electrical components, tocome into contact with water or saltwater. This could affect the systemfunction.

● Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

● Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharplyagainst another object.

● Do not change or modify the IntelligentKey.

● Wetting may damage the IntelligentKey. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-mediately wipe until it is completely dry.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM



● Do not place the Intelligent Key for anextended period in an area where tem-peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).

● Do not attach the Intelligent Key with akey holder that contains a magnet.

● Do not place the Intelligent Key nearequipment that produces a magneticfield, such as a TV, audio equipment andpersonal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSANrecommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent theunauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operatethe vehicle. For information regarding the erasingprocedure, contact a NISSAN dealer. OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be usedwhen the Intelligent Key is within the specifiedoperating range from the request switch s1 .

When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged orstrong radio waves are present near the operat-ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-ing range becomes narrower, and the IntelligentKey may not function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)from each request switch s1 .

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,handle or rear bumper, the request switches maynot function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the operatingrange, it is possible for anyone, even someonewho does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push therequest switch to lock/unlock the doors.

SPA2038



DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKSPRECAUTION

● Do not push the door handle request switchwith the Intelligent Key held in your hand asillustrated. The close distance to the doorhandle will cause the Intelligent Key systemto have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-gent Key is outside the vehicle.

● After locking with the door handle requestswitch, verify the doors are securely lockedby testing them.

● To prevent the Intelligent Key from being leftinside the vehicle, make sure you carry thekey with you and then lock the doors.

● Do not pull the door handle before pushingthe door handle request switch. The doorwill be unlocked but will not open. Releasethe door handle once and pull it again toopen the door.

INTELLIGENT KEY OPERATIONYou can lock or unlock the doors without takingthe key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, youcan lock or unlock all doors by pushing the doorhandle request switch within the range of opera-tion.

WPD0375 WPD0376



Locking doors

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion. (Remove the key if any key is in theignition switch.)

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch s1while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe outside buzzer sounds twice.

NOTE:

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while a mechanical key is in the igni-tion switch or the ignition switch is pushedin.

● Doors lock with the door handle requestswitch while the ignition switch is not in theLOCK position.

● Doors do not lock by pushing the doorhandle request switch while any door isopen. However, doors lock with the me-chanical key even if any door is open.

● Doors do not lock with the door handlerequest switch with the Intelligent Key insidethe vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.However, when an Intelligent Key is insidethe vehicle, doors can be locked with an-other Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

● After locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure that the doorshave been securely locked by operatingthe door handles or the trunk openerswitch.

● When locking the doors using the re-quest switch, make sure to have theIntelligent Key in your possession be-fore operating the request switch toprevent the Intelligent Key from beingleft in the vehicle.

● The request switch is operational onlywhen the Intelligent Key has been de-tected by the Intelligent Key system.

WPD0377 WPD0369



Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protectionis equipped with the Intelligent Key system.

When the driver’s side door is open, the doorsare locked, and then the Intelligent Key is putinside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;the lock will automatically unlock and the doorbuzzer sounds.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not functionunder the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the instrument panel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed ontop of the rear parcel.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the glove box or a storage bin.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side the door pockets.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed on orunder the spare tire area.

● When the Intelligent Key is placed in-side or near metallic materials.

The lockout protection may function whenthe Intelligent Key is outside the vehiclebut it is too close to the vehicle.

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch s1 .

3. The hazard indicator light flashes once andthe outside buzzer sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch s1again within 1 minute to unlock all doors.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking thedoors, that door may not be unlocked. Returningthe door handle to its original position will unlockthe door. If the door does not unlock after return-ing the door handle, push the door handle re-quest switch to unlock the door.

WPD0377



All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pushing the request switch.

● Opening any door.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

● Inserting the mechanical key into the ignitionswitch.

The interior light timer illuminates for 30 secondswhen a door is unlocked and the room lightswitch is in the DOOR position.

The interior light can be turned off without waitingfor 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-ing operations.

● Turning the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

Opening the trunk lid

1. Push the trunk opener request switch sA formore than 1 second while carrying the Intel-ligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will soundfour times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection isequipped with the Intelligent Key system.

WPD0369 LPD0378



When all doors are locked and the trunk lid isclosed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk willopen.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTEKEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTIONThe remote keyless entry function can operate alldoor locks using the remote keyless function ofthe Intelligent Key. The remote keyless functioncan operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) awayfrom the vehicle. The operating distance de-pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function will not func-tion under the following conditions:

● When the Intelligent Key is not within theoperational range.

● When the doors or the trunk are open or notclosed securely.

● When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure not to leave the key inthe vehicle.

Locking doors

1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push the button on the IntelligentKey.

4. The hazard warning lights flash twice andthe horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intelli-gent Key, be sure that the doors have beensecurely locked by operating the doorhandles.

WPD0359



Unlocking doors1. Push the button on the Intelligent Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once.

3. Push the button again within 1 minuteto unlock all doors.

All doors will be locked automatically unless oneof the following operations is performed within 1minute after pushing the button.

● Opening any doors.

● Pushing the ignition switch.

● Inserting the mechanical key into the ignitionswitch.

The interior light illuminates for 30 seconds whena door is unlocked and the room light switch is inthe DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting for 30seconds by performing one of the following op-erations.

● Turning the ignition switch to the ON posi-tion.

● Locking the doors with the remote controller.

● Switching the room light switch to the OFFposition.

Opening windowsThe Intelligent Key allows you to open windowsequipped with automatic operation simulta-neously.

● To open the windows, press the but-ton on the keyfob for longer than 3 sec-onds after all doors are unlocked.

The door windows will open while pressingthe button on the keyfob.

The door windows cannot be closed byusing the keyfob.

Releasing the trunk lidPush the button for longer than 0.5 sec-ond to open the trunk lid. The trunk release buttonwill not operate when the ignition switch is in theON position or when the trunk cancel switch is inthe OFF position. See “Cancel switch” in the“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section.

WPD0360 WPD0364



Using the panic alarmIf you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,you may activate the panic alarm to call attentionby pushing and holding the button on theIntelligent Key for longer than 0.5 second.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25seconds.

The panic alarm stops when:

● it has run for 25 seconds, or

● any button is pushed on the Intelligent Key.

Silencing the horn beep feature

If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-vated using the Intelligent Key.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep and lamp flashfeature with the keyfob, the display screen(if so equipped) will not show the currentmode and cannot be used to change themode. Use the keyfob to return to the pre-vious mode and re-enable the displayscreen control.

To deactivate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard warning lights will flash three times toconfirm that the horn beep feature has beendeactivated.

To activate: Press and hold theand buttons for at least 2 secondsonce more.

The hazard warning lights will flash once and thehorn will sound once to confirm that the hornbeep feature has been reactivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.

WPD0361 WPD0362



s1 P position selecting warning lights2 Intelligent Key system warning light

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLEREMINDERS

The Intelligent Key system is equipped with afunction that is designed to minimize improperoperations and to help prevent the vehicle frombeing stolen. The warning buzzer sounds and thewarning light illuminates when improper opera-tions are detected.

CAUTION

When the buzzer sounds and the warninglight illuminates, be sure to check boththe vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-pectedly by erroneous operation of the IntelligentKey or to help prevent the vehicle from beingstolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside andoutside the vehicle and a warning light comes onin the instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or the warninglight comes on, be sure to check the vehicle andthe Intelligent Key.

Audible reminder and warning whenlocking the doors

When the chime or buzzer sounds from insideand outside the vehicle, check for the following:

● The ignition switch is turned to the LOCKposition.

● The Intelligent Key is not left inside the ve-hicle.

● The selector lever is in the P position.

Audible reminder and warning whenthe engine stops

When the P position selecting warning light( ) in the instrument panel blinks in red:

● Make sure the selector lever is in the Pposition.

When the chime sounds intermittently:

● Make sure the selector lever is in the Pposition and the ignition switch is turned tothe LOCK position.

If the chime sounds continuously when the driv-er’s door is opened, check the following:

● The selector lever is in the P position and theignition switch is turned to the LOCK posi-tion.

● The mechanical key is not inserted into theignition switch.

● The warning chime may stop when one ofthe following is performed.

– Returning the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.

– Removing the mechanical key.

– Closing the doors.

WPD0380



Alarm and warning when the enginestartsWhen the Intelligent Key system warning light( ) blinks red and the outside buzzersounds, make sure the Intelligent Key is inside thevehicle.

Warning for low battery powerWhen the Intelligent Key battery is low, the Intel-ligent Key system warning light ( ) will blinkgreen for about 30 seconds after the ignitionswitch is turn to the ON position. This warning isto let you know that the battery of the IntelligentKey will run down soon. Replace it with a newone. Refer to “Battery replacement” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section.

NISSAN recommends replacing the battery at aNISSAN dealer.

Preventing the Intelligent Key frombeing left in the vehicleIf you lock all doors using the power door lockswitch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle, all ofthe doors unlock immediately and the buzzer willwarn you when the door is closed.



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the door handle requestswitch

The front door beep sounds for approxi-mately 2 seconds.

The doors cannot be locked.Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicleand push the door handle request switch.

When closing the doors

The front door beep sounds for approxi-mately 10 seconds.

The ignition knob is not turned to LOCKposition.

Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

The key warning light in the instrumentpanel blinks in red and the front door warn-ing beep sounds for approximately 3seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.

The front door beep sounds for approxi-mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.

The Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle. Take out the Intelligent Key from the vehicleand close the door.

When opening the driver’s door A warning chime sounds continuously.The ignition knob is not in LOCK position,or the mechanical key is inserted into theignition knob.

Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

Remove the mechanical key from the igni-tion knob.

When stopping the engine The P position warning light in the instru-ment panel blinks in red.

The selector lever is not in the P (Park)position.

Make sure that the selector lever is in the P(Park) position and turn the ignition knob toLOCK.

When turning the ignition knob The warning chime sounds The ignition knob is not turned to LOCK. Turn the ignition knob to LOCK.

When starting the engine The key warning light in the instrumentpanel blinks in green.

The battery charge is low. Replace the battery with a new one. See“Battery replacement” in the “Maintenanceand do-it-yourself” section.

When turning the ignition switch A warning chime sounds continuously. The ignition switch is not turned to theLOCK position.

Turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition.A warning chime sounds continuously and

the Intelligent Key lock warning light blinks.



Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key system warning light inthe instrument panel illuminates red.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. If the Intelligent Key system warning lightilluminates red even while you are carryingthe Intelligent Key, the battery is completelydischarged. Replace the battery with a newone. See “Battery replacement” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.



s1 Pull the hood lock release handle locatedbelow the driver side instrument panel. Thehood will spring up slightly.

s2 Push the lever at the front of the hood to theside as illustrated with your fingertips andraise the hood.

When closing the hood, lower it slowly and makesure it locks into place.

WARNING

● Make sure the hood is completelyclosed and latched before driving. Fail-ure to do so could cause the hood to flyopen and result in an accident.

● If you see steam or smoke coming fromthe engine compartment, to avoid injurydo not open the hood.

WARNING

● Do not drive with the trunk lid open. Thiscould allow dangerous exhaust gasesto be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”section of this manual.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.WPD0365

HOOD TRUNK LID



TRUNK LID RELEASE SWITCHThe trunk lid release switch is located below thearmrest of the driver’s door trim panel. To openthe trunk lid, pull the trunk lid release switch.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk liddown securely.

You can open the trunk lid with Intelligent Key.Refer to “Intelligent Key system” earlier in thissection.

Cancel switchWhen the cancel switch located inside the glovebox is OFF, the trunk lid cannot be opened withthe trunk lid release switch or with the IntelligentKey.

SECONDARY TRUNK LID RELEASE(4-seat model only)To open the trunk lid from the rear seat, fold downthe trunk compartment access lid and pull therear seat trunk release handle s1 . To close, pushthe trunk lid down securely.

Driver’s sideLPD0185 LPD0186 LPD0201



INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they arearound cars to prevent them from playingand becoming locked in the trunk wherethey could be seriously injured. Keep thecar locked, with the rear seatback andtrunk lid securely latched when not in use,and prevent children’s access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism providesa means of escape for children and adults in theevent they become locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-nated release handle until the lock releases andpush up on the trunk lid. The release handle ismade of a material that glows in the dark after abrief exposure to ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk compart-ment on the interior of the trunk lid.

OPENER OPERATIONThe fuel-filler door release is located on the driv-er’s door. To open the fuel-filler door, push therelease. To lock, close the fuel-filler door se-curely.

LPD0187 LPD0188

FUEL-FILLER DOOR



FUEL-FILLER CAP

The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type. Turn thecap counterclockwise to remove. To tighten, turnthe cap clockwise until ratcheting clicks areheard.

Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder s1 whilerefueling.

WARNING

● Gasoline is extremely flammable andhighly explosive under certain condi-tions. You could be burned or seriouslyinjured if it is misused or mishandled.Always stop the engine and do notsmoke or allow open flames or sparksnear the vehicle when refueling.

● Fuel may be under pressure. Turn thecap a third of a turn, and wait for any“hissing” sound to stop to prevent fuelfrom spraying out and possibly causingpersonal injury. Then remove the cap.

● Do not attempt to top off the fuel tankafter the fuel pump nozzle shuts offautomatically. Continued refueling maycause fuel overflow, resulting in fuelspray and possibly a fire.

● Use only an original equipment typefuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has abuilt-in safety valve needed for properoperation of the fuel system and emis-sion control system. An incorrect capcan result in a serious malfunction andpossible injury. It could also cause themalfunction indicator light to come on.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body toattempt to start your vehicle.

● Do not fill a portable fuel container inthe vehicle or trailer. Static electricitycan cause an explosion of flammableliquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle ortrailer. To reduce the risk of seriousinjury or death when filling portable fuelcontainers:

– Always place the container on theground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices whenfilling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contactwith the container while you are fill-ing it.

– Use only approved portable fuel con-tainers for flammable liquid.

LPD0189



CAUTION

● If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,flush it away with water to avoid paintdamage.

● Tighten until the fuel-filler cap clicks.Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the mal-

function indicator light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose ormissing, tighten or install the cap andcontinue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few drivingtrips, have the vehicle inspected by aNISSAN dealer.

● For additional information, see the“Malfunction indicator light (MIL)” inthe “Instruments and Controls” sectionearlier in this manual.

WARNING

Do not adjust the steering wheel whiledriving. You could lose control of yourvehicle and cause an accident.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel anycloser to you than is necessary for propersteering operation and comfort. The driv-er’s air bag inflates with great force. If youare unrestrained, leaning forward, sittingsideways or out of position in any way, youare at greater risk of injury or death in acrash. You may also receive serious orfatal injuries from the air bag if you are upagainst it when it inflates. Always sit backagainst the seatback and as far away aspractical from the steering wheel. Alwaysuse the seat belts.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION (if soequipped)

Tilt operation

Push the switch s1 to adjust the steering wheelup or down s2 to the desired position.

Entry/Exit function

The automatic drive positioner system will makethe steering wheel move up automatically whenthe driver’s door is opened and the ignitionswitch is in the LOCK position. This lets the driverget into and out of the seat more easily. The

WPD0366

TILTING TELESCOPIC STEERINGCOLUMN



steering wheel moves back into position whenthe driver’s door is closed and the ignition switchis pushed.

For more information, see “Automatic drive posi-tioner” later in this section.

Telescopic operationPush the switch s1 to adjust the steering wheelforward or backward s3 to the desired position.

MANUAL OPERATION

Tilt operation

Pull the lock lever s1 forward and adjust thesteering wheel up or down s2 to the desiredposition.

Push the lock lever back to lock the steeringwheel in place.

Telescopic operation

Push the lock lever s3 down and adjust thesteering wheel forward or backward s4 to thedesired position.

Pull the lock lever up firmly to lock the steeringwheel in place.

WPD0367



s1 To block glare from the front, swing down themain sun visor.

s2 To block glare from the side, remove themain sun visor from the center mount andswing the visor to the side.

s3 Slide the extension sun visor in or out asneeded.

CAUTION

● Do not store the sun visor before return-ing the extension to its originalposition.

● Do not pull the extension sun visor forc-edly downward. VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visordown and flip open the mirror cover. The vanitymirror will illuminate when the mirror cover isopen.

WPD0297

WPD0324

SUN VISORS



AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLAREREARVIEW MIRROR

The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-cally dims according to the intensity of the head-lights of the vehicle following you. The automaticanti-glare feature operates only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The indicator light s1 will illuminate when theautomatic anti-glare feature is operating.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

● the O button for inside mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button for inside mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,press:

● the | button for inside mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button for inside mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn on.

Some vehicles are also equipped with automaticanti-glare outside mirrors. For additional informa-tion, see “Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors”later in this section.

For information on HomeLinkT Universal Trans-ceiver operation, see the “HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-tion of this manual.

For information on the compass display (if soequipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section of this manual.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sensorss2 or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of thesensors, resulting in improper operation.

Without compassWPD0332

With compassWPD0333

MIRRORS



OUTSIDE MIRRORS

The outside mirror remote control will operateonly when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ONposition.

Move the small switch s1 to select the right or leftmirror. Adjust each mirror to the desired positionusing the large switch s2 .

WARNING

● Objects viewed in the outside mirror onthe passenger side are closer than theyappear. Be careful when moving to theright. Using only this mirror could causean accident. Use the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder to properlyjudge distances to other objects.

● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.You could lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.

Automatic anti-glare outside mirrors (ifso equipped)

The outside mirrors will automatically dim duringnighttime conditions to reduce the glare from theheadlights of trailing vehicles. The automatic anti-glare feature operates only when the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

The automatic anti-glare feature will be on whenstarting the vehicle. The indicator light on theautomatic anti-glare rearview mirror will illuminatewhen the automatic anti-glare feature is on.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:

● the O button on rearview mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button on rearview mirrors withcompass.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,press:

● the | button on rearview mirrors withoutcompass.

● the button on rearview mirrorsequipped with compass.

The indicator light will turn on.

For information on the automatic anti-glare rear-view mirror, see “Automatic anti-glare rearviewmirror” earlier in this section.

LPD0237



Manual folding outside mirrors (if soequipped)Push the mirrors backward to fold them.

Power folding outside mirrors (if soequipped)

CAUTION

Do not manually fold the power foldingmirrors. Manually folding the mirrors candamage the mirrors.

Press the switch to open or close the mirrors.

Reverse tilt-down feature (if soequipped)

The reverse tilt-down feature will turn the se-lected outside mirror surface downward to pro-vide better rear visibility close to the vehicle.

When the ignition switch is in the ON position,turn the outside mirror control switch to the left orright position. Only one mirror can be selected ata time.

Move the shift selector lever to R (Reverse). Theselected mirror will turn downward.

The selected mirror surface will return to its origi-nal position when any of the following have oc-curred:

● The shift selector lever is moved to any po-sition other than R (Reverse).

● The outside mirror control switch is set to theneutral position.

● The ignition switch is turned OFF.

MPA0008 LPD0196



NOTE:

If the outside mirror control switch is in theneutral position, neither mirror will turndownward when the shift selector lever ismoved to R (Reverse).

For more information regarding this feature andhow to save the R (Reverse) mirror tilt-downadjustment in the automatic drive positionermemory, refer to “Automatic drive positioner” laterin this section.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)The electric control type outside mirrors (if soequipped) can be heated to defrost, defog, orde-ice for improved visibility. Press the rear win-dow defogger switch to activate the heatingfunction. Press the switch again to deactivate, orthe heating function will automatically turn offafter approximately 15 minutes.

The automatic drive positioner system has twofeatures:

● Memory storage function

● Entry/exit function

MEMORY STORAGE FUNCTION

Two positions for the driver’s seat, steering col-umn, and outside mirrors can be stored in theautomatic drive positioner memory. Follow theseprocedures to use the memory system.

1. Set the Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) selector lever to the P (Park) position.

2. Turn the ignition ON.

LPD0197

AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER (ifso equipped)



3. Adjust the driver’s seat, steering column,and outside mirrors to the desired positionsby manually operating each adjustingswitch. For additional information, see“Seats” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section and“Pedal position adjustment” and “Outsidemirrors” earlier in this section.

During this step, do not turn the ignition toany position other than ON.

4. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully for atleast 1 second.

The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected positions are stored in the selectedmemory (1 or 2).

If a new memory is stored in the same memoryswitch, the previous memory will be deleted.

Linking a keyfob to a stored memoryposition

Each keyfob can be linked to a stored memoryposition (memory switch 1 or 2) with the follow-ing procedure.

1. Follow the steps for storing a memory posi-tion.

2. While the indicator light for the memoryswitch being set is illuminated for 5 sec-onds, press the button on the keyfob.The indicator light will blink. After the indica-tor light goes off, the keyfob is linked to thatmemory setting.

With the key removed from the ignition switch,press the button on the keyfob. The driv-er’s seat and outside mirrors will move to thememorized position.

NOTE:

If a new memory position is saved to thememory switch, the keyfob automaticallyre-links.

Procedure for storing the outsidemirror positions for best visibility whenbacking up

An outside mirror position for backing up can bestored for each memory switch (1 and 2).

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition ON. (Do not start the en-gine.)

3. Push the memory switch 1 or 2 fully for atleast 1 second to operate the automaticdrive positioner.

4. Turn the outside mirror control switch to L(left).

5. Depress the brake pedal.

6. Move the CVT selector lever to R (Reverse).

7. Adjust the mirror to the desired viewing po-sition for backing up by operating the out-side mirror control switch.

8. Push the SET switch and, within 5 seconds,push the memory switch 1 or 2 selected instep 3 fully for at least 1 second.

● The indicator light for the pushed memoryswitch will come on and stay on for approxi-mately 5 seconds after pushing the switch.After the indicator light goes off, the se-lected mirror position is stored in the se-lected memory (1 or 2).

9. Turn the outside mirror control switch to R(right). Repeat the above procedure to ad-just the right mirror position and store in theselected memory.

● When the driver’s seat, accelerator andbrake pedals, and outside mirrors are not inthe memorized position, the outside mirrorwill move with the initial tilt-down angle.



Confirming memory storage

● Turn the ignition ON and push the SETswitch. If the main memory has not beenstored, the indicator light will come on forapproximately 0.5 seconds. When thememory has stored the position, the indica-tor light will stay on for approximately 5 sec-onds.

● If the battery cable is disconnected, or if thefuse opens, the memory storage function willbe canceled and must be restarted before astored memory position can be set again.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the memory storage function. Youcan also restart the memory storage functionusing the following procedure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more thantwo times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

Once the memory storage function has beenrestarted, you can store a memory position.See “Memory storage function” earlier in thissection.

Selecting the memorized position

Set the CVT selector lever to the P (Park) posi-tion, then:

● Within 45 seconds of opening the driver’sdoor, push the memory switch (1 or 2) fullyfor at least 1 second, or

● Turn the ignition switch to the ON positionand push the memory switch (1 or 2) fully forat least 1 second.

The driver’s seat, steering column, and outsidemirrors will move to the memorized position withthe indicator light blinking, and then the light willstay on for approximately 5 seconds.

ENTRY/EXIT FUNCTION

This system is designed so that the driver’s seatand automatic operation steering column (if soequipped) will automatically move when the CVTselector lever is in the P (Park) position. Thisallows the driver to get into and out of the driver’sseat more easily.

The driver’s seat will slide backward and thesteering wheel will move up when the driver’sdoor is opened and the ignition switch is in theLOCK position.

The driver’s seat and steering wheel will return toprevious position when the driver’s door is closedand the ignition switch is pushed

The entry/exit function can be adjusted or can-celed. See “Vehicle electronic systems” in the“Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audioand phone systems” section of this manual.

Restarting the entry/exit functionIf the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuseopens, the entry/exit function will be disabled.Drive the vehicle over 25 MPH (40 km/h) torestart the entry/exit function. You can also restartthe entry/exit function using the following proce-dure.

1. Connect the battery cable or replace thefuse.

2. Open and close the driver’s door more thantwo times with the ignition key in the LOCKposition.

The entry/exit function should now work properly.



SYSTEM OPERATIONThe automatic drive positioner system will notwork or will stop operating under the followingconditions:

● When the vehicle speed is above 4 MPH (7km/h).

● When any of the memory switches arepushed while the automatic drive positioneris operating.

● When the adjusting switch for the driver’sseat is turned on while the automatic drivepositioner is operating.

● When the memory switch (1 or 2) is notpushed and held for at least 1 second.

● When the seat has been already moved tothe memorized position.

● When no seat position is stored in thememory switch.

● When the CVT selector lever is moved fromP (Park) to any other position.

● When the driver’s door remains open morethan 45 seconds and the ignition switch isnot in the ON position.

The automatic drive positioner system can beadjusted and canceled for vehicles with naviga-tion system. See “Vehicle electronic systems” inthe “Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audioand phone systems” section of this manual.




MEMO

4 Display screen, heater, air conditioner,audio and phone systems

Control panel buttons — with monochrome screen . . . . 4-2How to use the TRIP INFO button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5How to use the AUDIO button(for control panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Door warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5

Control panel buttons — with navigation system. . . . . . . 4-6How to use the joystick and ENTER button . . . . . . . . 4-6How to use the BACK button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Setting up the start-up screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7How to use the TRIP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7How to use the SETTING button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11

button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Ventilators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18Heater and air conditioner (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20Operating tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21

Servicing air conditioner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . 4-22Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)player (Type A)/CD changer (Type B) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-36CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41Steering wheel switch for audio control . . . . . . . . . . 4-42Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43

Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-44

Using the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-45Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47Getting started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47List of voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49Speaker adaptation (SA) mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-54Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-56


WARNING

● Do not disassemble or modify this sys-tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,fire, or electrical shock.

● Do not use this system if you notice anyabnormality, such as a frozen screen orlack of sound. Continued use of thesystem may result in accident, fire orelectric shock.

● In case you notice any foreign object inthe system hardware, spill liquid on it,or notice smoke or smell coming fromit, stop using the system immediatelyand contact your nearest NISSANdealer. Ignoring such conditions maylead to accidents, fire or electricalshock.

LHA0670

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHMONOCHROME SCREEN

4-2 Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems


1. TRIP INFO button (P. 4-3)2. CLOCK DISP button (P. 4-5)3. AUDIO button (P. 4-5)When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

TRIP INFO button — This is a button on thecontrol panel. By pressing this button you canselect the item or perform this action.

HOW TO USE THE TRIP INFOBUTTONWhen the TRIP INFO button is pressed, thefollowing modes will display on the screen.

Dist. to Empty → Average Speed → FuelEconomy → Trip Time → Audio or OFF → Dist. toEmpty

Distance to empty (MI or km)The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while the ignitionswitch is OFF is small, the display just beforethe ignition switch is turned OFF may con-tinue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves, thefuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarilychange the display.

LHA0617

Display screen, heater, air conditioner, audio and phone systems 4-3


Average speed (MPH or km/h)The Average Speed mode shows the averagespeed since the last reset. To calculate the aver-age speed, driving distance is divided by drivingtime.

For approximately the first 30 seconds after areset or reconnecting the battery cables, thedisplay will show (*).

Resetting average speed

The average speed calculation can be reset to 0.Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap-proximately 2 seconds.

Fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)The Fuel Economy mode shows the average fueleconomy since the last reset.

For approximately the first 30 seconds and 1/3mile (500 m) after a reset or connecting thebattery cables, the display will show (*).

Resetting fuel economy

The fuel economy calculation can be reset to 0.Press the TRIP INFO button for more than ap-proximately 2 seconds.

Trip timeThe trip time mode displays the trip time since thelast reset.

The maximum time that can be displayed by theTrip Time screen is 99 hours : 59 minutes : 59seconds.

Resetting trip time

The Trip Time calculation can be reset to 0. Pressthe TRIP INFO button for more than approxi-mately 2 seconds.

LHA0618 LHA0619 LHA0671



CLOCK

The digital clock displays the time when the igni-tion key is in OFF, ACC or ON. To enable theclock display, press the CLOCK DISP button.

If the power supply is disconnected, theclock will not indicate the correct time.Readjust the time.

Adjusting the time

The audio system must be turned off to adjust thetime.

To adjust the time, press and hold the CLOCKDISP button for more than approximately 1.5seconds. Hour Adjust will appear on the screenand the hours will start flashing.

Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust thehour.

Press the CLOCK DISP button again. MinuteAdjust will appear on the screen and the minuteswill start flashing.

Press the SEEK or TUNE button to adjust theminutes.

Press the CLOCK DISP button again. Clock IsSet will appear on the screen.

NOTE:

If you enter the clock adjustment mode anddo not press any button for approximately 7seconds, the screen will change to Clock IsSet. The screen will exit out of the clockadjustment mode and return to the audio oroff screen.

HOW TO USE THE AUDIO BUTTON(for control panel)Pressing the AUDIO button will changethe settings menu as follows:

Bass → Mid → Treble → Fade → Balance →Speed Sense Volume → Beep ON/OFF → Lan-guage → Audio or OFF → Bass

For additional information, see “Audio System”later in this section.

Beep on/offTo turn off the beep, press the TUNE button toselect “OFF”. This will disable the beep soundduring menu selection (except some cautionbeep sounds).

LanguageThe language can be changed to “ENGLISH” or“FRANÇAIS” by pressing the TUNE button.

DOOR WARNINGThe DOOR OPEN screen will be automaticallydisplayed any time a door or the trunk is open.

When a door or the trunk is open, priority forwhich door is shown in the display is as follows:

Front Left → Front Right → Rear Left → RearRight → Trunk

If the door is open for longer than 10 seconds thescreen will no longer display which door is open,but the DOOR OPEN warning will remain untilthe door is closed.

LHA0672



1. brightness control button(P. 4-18)

2. BACK (previous) button (P. 4-7)3. Joystick and ENTER button (P. 4-6)4. SETTING button (P. 4-11)5. TRIP button (P. 4-7)

6. DEST button*7. ROUTE button*8. MAP button*9. GUIDE VOICE button*10. zoom out button*

zoom in button*

*For Navigation system control buttons, refer tothe separate Navigation System Owner’sManual.

When you use this system, make sure the engineis running.

If you use the system with the engine notrunning (ignition ON or ACC) for a longtime, it will use up all the battery power,and the engine will not start.

Reference symbols:

ENTER button — This is a button on the controlpanel.

“Display”key — This is a select key on the screen.By selecting this key you can proceed to the nextfunction.

HOW TO USE THE JOYSTICK ANDENTER BUTTONUse the joystick to choose an item on the displayscreen. Move the joystick up, down, left or right tohighlight an item. Then press the ENTER buttonto select the item or perform the action.

WHA0677

CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS — WITHNAVIGATION SYSTEM



HOW TO USE THE BACK BUTTONThis button has two functions.

● Go back to the previous display (cancel).

If you press the BACK button during setup, thesetup will be canceled and/or the display willreturn to the previous screen.

● Finish setup.

In some screens pressing the BACK button ac-cepts the changes made during setup.

SETTING UP THE START-UPSCREENWhen you turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, thesystem start-up warning is displayed on thescreen. Read the warning and select the “OK”key by pressing the ENTER button.

If you do not press the ENTER button, the Navi-gation system will not proceed to the next step inthe Navigation display.

If you do not touch a button or screen key formore than 1 minute on the system start-up warn-ing screen, the screen will change to the audioscreen automatically.

To proceed to the next step, refer to the separateNavigation System Owner’s Manual.

HOW TO USE THE TRIP BUTTON

When the TRIP button is pressed, the followingmodes will display on the screen.

Warning message (if any) → TRIP 1 → TRIP 2 →FUEL ECONOMY → MAINTENANCE → Audioor OFF → TRIP 1

Each trip display tracks an independent trip anddisplays the following:

● Elapsed Time - Journey time since the lastreset up to a maximum of 99 hours and 59minutes.

● Driving Distance - Distance driven (mile orkm) since the last reset.

● Average Speed - Average speed driven(MPH or km/h) since the last reset.

Resetting trip 1 and trip 2Each trip screen can be reset to 0. Press the TRIPbutton to select the TRIP screen to be reset.

● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 1.5 seconds.

LHA0552



Fuel economy

Press the TRIP button to display Average FuelEconomy and Distance To Empty.

Average fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km)

The Average Fuel Economy is calculated basedon fuel consumption since the last reset. Thedisplay is updated every 30 seconds and 1/3mile (500 m). After a reset or connecting thebattery cables, the display will show (**.*).

Resetting fuel economy

The average fuel economy calculation can bereset to 0. Press the TRIP button repeatedly untilthe FUEL ECONOMY menu is shown, then ei-ther:

● Select the “Reset” key on screen by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Press the TRIP button for more than approxi-mately 1.5 seconds.

Distance to empty (MI or km)

The Distance To Empty (DTE) mode provides youwith an estimation of the distance that can bedriven before refueling. The DTE is constantlycalculated based on the amount of fuel in the fueltank and the actual fuel consumption. The displayis updated every 30 seconds. When the fuel levelis low, the DTE display will change to (*).

NOTE:

● If the amount of fuel added while the ignitionswitch is OFF is small, the display just beforethe ignition switch is turned OFF may con-tinue to be displayed.

● When driving uphill or rounding curves, thefuel in the tank shifts, which may momentarilychange the display.

Maintenance itemsPress the TRIP button to display maintenanceinformation or set maintenance intervals for thefollowing:

● Engine Oil

● Tire Rotation

● Tire Pressure (if so equipped)

For setting the Tire Pressure display, refer to “Tirepressure information” later in this section.

LHA0553 LHA0554



Changing the maintenance interval

Select the “Engine Oil” or “Tire Rotation” keyusing the joystick and press the ENTER button todisplay the screen to change the maintenanceinterval.

Select the “Maintenance Schedule”key using thejoystick and move the joystick to right or left to setthe maintenance interval.

Resetting the maintenance interval

The ENGINE OIL and TIRE ROTATION mainte-nance intervals can be reset to 0 miles (kilome-ters).

Select the “Reset” key using the joystick andpress the ENTER button.

Displaying the maintenance notice re-minder

Select the “Display Maintenance Notification”key and press the ENTER button to display theMAINTENANCE INFORMATION automaticallyat the set maintenance interval.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen (ENGINEOIL and TIRE ROTATION) will be automaticallydisplayed as shown when both of the followingconditions are met:

● The vehicle is driven the set distance and theignition key is turned OFF.

LHA0555 LHA0556 LHA0483



● The ignition key is turned ON the next timethe vehicle will be driven.

To return to the previous display after the MAIN-TENANCE NOTICE screen is displayed, pressthe BACK button.

The MAINTENANCE NOTICE screen displayseach time the key is turned ON until one of thefollowing conditions are met:

● “Reset” key is selected.

● “Display Maintenance Notification” is set toOFF.

● The maintenance interval is set again.

Tire pressure information

To display tire pressure information, press theTRIP button repeatedly until the MAINTENANCEscreen is displayed. Select the “Tire Pressure”key using the joystick and press the ENTER but-ton.

Pressure indication in ** psi on the screen indi-cates that the pressure is being measured. Aftera few driving trips, the pressure for each tire willbe displayed randomly.

The order of tire pressure figures displayed onthe screen does not correspond with the actualorder of the tire position.

Tire pressure rises and falls depending on theheat caused by the vehicle’s operation and theoutside temperature.

In case of low tire pressure, a message is dis-played on the screen:

LOW PRESSURE — Check All Tires.

WARNING

● When a spare tire is mounted or a wheelis replaced, tire pressure will not beindicated, the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) will not function andthe low tire pressure warning light willflash. Contact your NISSAN dealer assoon as possible for tire replacementand/or system resetting.


LHA0557



HOW TO USE THE SETTINGBUTTONWhen the SETTING button is pressed, the SET-TINGS screen will appear on the display. You canselect and/or adjust several functions, featuresand modes that are available for your vehicle.Move the joystick and press the ENTER button toselect each item to be set.

Display settingsSelect the “Display” key and press the ENTERbutton. The DISPLAY SETTINGS screen will ap-pear.

Brightness/contrast/map background:

Select the “Brightness/Contrast/Map Back-ground” key to adjust the brightness and contrastof the map background. Use the joystick to adjustthe brightness to darker or brighter and the con-trast to lower or higher.

Use the joystick to select the “Map Background”key. Press the ENTER button or move the joystickright or left to choose a “Dark” or “Bright” mapbackground.

The new settings are automatically saved whenyou exit the setting screen by pressing the BACKbutton or any other mode button.

LHA0558 LHA0632 LHA0633



Display off:

Select the “Display Off” key. The indicator of the“Display Off” turns amber and the messageabove will be displayed briefly. When the audio,HVAC (Heater and air conditioner), or any modebutton on the control panel is operated, the dis-play turns on for that operation. If one of thecontrol panel buttons is pressed, the display willnot automatically turn off until that operation isfinished. Otherwise, the screen turns off auto-matically after 5 seconds.

To turn the screen on,

● Press the SETTING button and select the“Display” key and then select the “DisplayOff” key. Then set the screen to on by press-ing the ENTER button, or

● Hold the button for approximately 2seconds and the message “resuming dis-play” will appear and the “Display Off” keywill be automatically turned on (no amberindicator).

Lower display setting:

You can choose to display the audio or HVAC(Heater and air conditioner) functions on thelower part of the display. Select the “Lower Dis-play Setting” key by using the joystick. Then se-lect the “Audio” or “HVAC” key using the joystickor by pressing the ENTER button.


LHA0642 LHA0632



Any time audio information is shown on the mainpart of the screen, HVAC information will bedisplayed on the lower part of the screen. HVACinformation will be shown even if “Audio” is se-lected to be displayed on the lower part of thescreen.

Vehicle electronic systems

Select the “Vehicle Electronic Systems” key byusing the joystick and pressing the ENTER but-ton. The VEHICLE ELECTRONIC SYSTEMSscreen will be displayed.

You can set the following operating conditions byselecting the desired item using the joystick, thenpressing the ENTER button. The indicator light,box at the left of the selected item, alternatelyturns on and off each time the ENTER button ispressed.

Indicator light is illuminated — ON

Indicator light is not illuminated — OFFLHA0651 LHA0673 LHA0674



Adjust driver seat when exiting vehicle:With this option ON, the driver’s seat automati-cally moves back and returns to the original po-sition for ease of exit and entry.

Lift steering column when exiting vehicle:With this option ON, the steering column auto-matically tilts up and returns to the original posi-tion for ease of exit and entry.

Selective door unlock: Select to changewhich doors will unlock first during an unlockingoperation:

Only the driver’s door ←→ All the doors

Keyless remote response — horn: Select toturn on or turn off the horn chirp mode used whenthe LOCK button on the Intelligent Key ispressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the Intelligent Key, thedisplay screen will not show the currentmode. Use the Intelligent Key to return tothe previous mode and re-enable the dis-play screen control.

Keyless remote response — lights: Select toturn on or turn off the hazard indicator flash modeused when the LOCK or UNLOCK button on theIntelligent Key is pressed.

NOTE:

If you change the horn beep or the lampflash feature with the Intelligent Key, themode will not be changed with the display.Use the Intelligent Key to return to theprevious mode and re-enable the displaycontrol.

Auto re-lock time: Select to set the length oftime before doors automatically re-lock.

LHA0675 LHA0565



Sensitivity of automatic headlights: Selectto change the sensitivity setting of the automaticheadlights:

● Lower: less sensitive, automatic headlightswill take longer to come on when the head-light sensor senses less ambient light.

● Higher: more sensitive, automatic headlightswill come on quicker when the headlightsensor senses less ambient light.

Automatic headlights off delay: Select tochange the setting for the length of time theautomatic headlights remain on after exiting thevehicle.

Speed dependent wiper: Select to turn on orturn off the driving speed dependent intermittentwiper function.

Intelligent Key lock response — sound: Se-lect to change the sound of the Intelligent Keymode used when a request switch is pushed tolock the doors.

Select to turn off all sounds made when a requestswitch is pushed to lock the doors, by selectingthe “OFF” key using the joystick.

Intelligent Key unlock response — beepsound: Select to turn on or turn off the sound ofthe Intelligent Key mode used when a requestswitch is pushed to unlock the doors.

Intelligent Key lock/unlock function: Selectto turn on or turn off the door lock and unlockmodes used when a request switch is pushed.

Return all settings to default: Select tochange all VEHICLE ELECTRONICS SYSTEMSto their default settings.

System settings

Select the “System Settings” key by using thejoystick and pressing the ENTER button. TheSYSTEM SETTINGS screen will be displayed.

Language/unit

The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear whenselecting the “Language/Unit” key and pressingthe ENTER button.

Language: English or French

Unit: US — mile, °F, MPGMetric — km, °C, L/100 km

LHA0561



You can select the language and unit using thejoystick or pressing the ENTER button.

The settings are automatically saved when youexit the menu by pressing the BACK button orany other mode button.

Clock

Adjusting the time:

Select the “Hours”or “Minutes” key and move thejoystick to the right or left to adjust the time.

The time will change step by step.


Setting daylight savings time:

Use the “Daylight Saving Time” key to adjust theclock to daylight savings time.

ON: The displayed time advances by 1 hour.

OFF: The current time is displayed.

LHA0562 LHA0566



Adjusting the time to the GPS:

Select the “Auto Adjust” key.

The time will be reset to the GPS time.

Selecting the time zone:

1. Select the “Select Time Zone” key.

The TIME ZONE screen will appear.

2. Select one of the following zones, depend-ing on the current location.

● Pacific zone

● Mountain zone

● Central zone

● Eastern zone

● Atlantic zone

● Newfoundland zone

After selection, the CLOCK SETTINGS screenwill appear.

LHA0567 LHA0568 LHA0563



The GPS time (manual time) corresponding tothe selected zone will be displayed. Pacific zonehas been set as the initial (default) setting.

Beep setting

With this option ON, a beep will sound if anyaudio button is pressed.

Navigation settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

Guidance voice settings

Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-er’s Manual for information regarding these set-tings.

BUTTONTo change the display brightness, pressthe button. Pressing the button again willchange the display to “DAY” or “NIGHT” display.Then, adjust the brightness by moving the joy-stick right or left.

If no operation is done within 10 seconds, or if theBACK button is pressed, the display will return tothe previous display.

Adjust air flow direction by moving the ventilatorslides.

Open or close the ventilators by using the dial.Move the dial toward the to open the ven-tilators or toward the to close them.

CenterWHA0686

SideWHA0687

VENTILATORS



1. Temperature control dial (driver’s side)2. (fan speed control) button3. AUTO climate control ON button4. MODE (manual air flow control) button5. (front defroster) button6. DUAL (passenger side temperature

control) ON/OFF button7. Temperature control dial (passenger’s

side)8. Air recirculation button9. Rear window defroster switch10. A/C (air conditioner) ON/OFF button11. OFF button for climate control system

WARNING

● The air conditioner cooling function op-erates only when the engine is running.

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

RearWHA0688 LHA0681

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER(automatic)



● Do not use the recirculation mode forlong periods as it may cause the interiorair to become stale and the windows tofog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls toactivate the air conditioner.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified heating(AUTO)This mode may be used all year round as thesystem automatically works to keep a constanttemperature. Air flow distribution and fan speedare also controlled automatically.

1. Push the AUTO button on. (AUTO will bedisplayed.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to the leftor right to set the desired temperature.

● Adjust the temperature display to about 75°F (24° C) for normal operation.

● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are also con-trolled automatically.

● A visible mist may be seen coming from theventilators in hot, humid conditions as the airis cooled rapidly. This does not indicate amalfunction.

3. You can individually set driver and front pas-senger side temperature using each tem-perature control dial. When the DUAL but-ton or passenger side temperature dial isturned, the DUAL indicator will come on. Toturn off the passenger side temperaturecontrol, push the DUAL button.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate. When youneed to heat only, use this mode.

1. Push the A/C button. (A/C OFF will be dis-played and A/C indicator will turn off.)

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set thedesired temperature.

● The temperature of the passenger compart-ment will be maintained automatically. Airflow distribution and fan speed are also con-trolled automatically.

● Do not set the temperature lower than theoutside air temperature. Otherwise the sys-tem may not work properly.

● Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or defogging

1. Push the defroster button on. The in-dicator light on the button will come on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set thedesired temperature.

● To quickly remove ice from the outside of thewindows, set the fan speed to maximum.

● As soon as possible after the windshield isclean, push the AUTO button to return to theautomatic mode.

● When the front defroster button is pushed,the air conditioner will automatically beturned on at outside temperatures above23°F (25°C). The air recirculate mode auto-matically turns off, allowing outside air to bedrawn into the passenger compartment tofurther improve the defogging performance.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Push the fan control button to manuallycontrol the fan speed.

Push the AUTO button to return to automaticcontrol of the fan speed.

Air recirculation

Push the air recirculation button to recirculateinterior air inside the vehicle. The indicator lighton the button will come on.



The air recirculation cannot be activated whenthe air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.

Air flow controlPushing the MODE button manually controls airflow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and sideventilators.

— Air flows from center and sideventilators and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.— Air flows from defroster and foot

outlets.— Air flows from defroster outlets.

To turn system offPress the OFF button.

OPERATING TIPS● When the engine coolant temperature and

outside air temperature are low, the air flowfrom the foot outlets may not operate for amaximum of 150 seconds. However, this isnot a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-ture warms up, air flow from the foot outletswill operate normally.

The sunload sensor, located on the top passen-ger side of the instrument panel, helps the systemmaintain a constant temperature. Do not put any-thing on or around this sensor.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed withthe environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the earth’sozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricantswill cause severe damage to your air conditionersystem. See “Air conditioner system refrigerantand lubricant recommendations” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” section of thismanual.

A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-mentally friendly” air conditioning system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-frigerant under high pressure. To avoidpersonal injury, any air conditioner ser-vice should be done only by an experi-enced technician with proper equipment.

WHA0209

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER



RADIO

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand press the POWER/VOLUME control knob toturn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with theengine not running, the key should be turned tothe ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station signalstrength, distance from radio transmitter, build-ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-ences. Intermittent changes in reception qualitynormally are caused by these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-hicle may influence radio reception quality.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped withstate-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-dio reception. These circuits are designed toextend reception range, and to enhance the qual-ity of that reception.

However there are some general characteristicsof both FM and AM radio signals that can affectradio reception quality in a moving vehicle, evenwhen the finest equipment is used. These char-acteristics are completely normal in a given re-ception area, and do not indicate any malfunctionin your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly change be-cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,signal distance and interference from other ve-hicles can work against ideal reception. De-scribed below are some of the factors that canaffect your radio reception.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30miles (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single chan-nel) FM having slightly more range than stereoFM. External influences may sometimes interferewith FM station reception even if the FM station iswithin 25 miles (40 km). The strength of the FMsignal is directly related to the distance betweenthe transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow aline-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the samecharacteristics as light. For example, they willreflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away froma station transmitter, the signals will tend to fadeand/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interference frombuildings, large hills or due to antenna position(usually in conjunction with increased distancefrom the station transmitter) static or flutter canbe heard. This can be reduced by adjusting thetreble control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflectivecharacteristics of FM signals, direct and reflectedsignals reach the receiver at the same time. Thesignals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-mentary flutter or loss of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency, canbend around objects and skip along the ground.In addition, the signals can be bounced off theionosphere and bent back to earth. Because ofthese characteristics, AM signals are also sub-ject to interference as they travel from transmitterto receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passingthrough freeway underpasses or in areas withmany tall buildings. It can also occur for severalseconds during ionospheric turbulence even inareas where no obstacles exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electricalpower lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if soequipped)

When the satellite radio is first installed or thebattery has been replaced, the satellite radio maynot work properly. This is not a malfunction. Waitmore than 10 minutes with satellite radio ON and

AUDIO SYSTEM



the vehicle outside of any metal or large buildingfor satellite radio to receive all of the necessarydata.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT band option isselected unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

Satellite radio performance may be affected ifcargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radiosignal.

If possible, do not put cargo over the satelliteantenna.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

● Do not force a compact disc into the CDinsert slot. This could damage the CDand/or CD changer/player.

● Trying to load a CD with the CD doorclosed could damage the CD and/or CDchanger.

● Only one CD can be loaded into the CDplayer at a time.

● Only use high quality 4.7 inches (12 cm)round discs that have the “COMPACTdisc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the discor packaging.

● During cold weather or rainy days, theplayer may malfunction due to the hu-midity. If this occurs, remove the CDand dehumidify or ventilate the playercompletely.

● The player may skip while driving onrough roads.

● The CD player sometimes cannot func-tion when the compartment tempera-ture is extremely high or low.Decrease/increase the temperaturebefore use.

LHA0099



● Do not expose the CD to direct sun-light.

● CDs that are in poor condition or aredirty, scratched or covered with finger-prints may not work properly.

● The following CDs may not work prop-erly:

● Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

● Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

● Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

● Do not use the following CDs as theymay cause the CD player to malfunc-tion:

● 3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

● CDs that are not round

● CDs with a paper label

● CDs that are warped, scratched, orhave abnormal edges

● This audio system can only play pre-recorded CDs. It has no capability torecord or burn CDs.

● If the CD cannot be played, one of thefollowing messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC:

● Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-rectly (the label side is facing up,etc.).

● Confirm that the CD is not bent orwarped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT:

This is an error due to excessive tem-perature inside the player. Remove theCD by pressing the EJECT button. Aftera short time, reinsert the CD. The CDcan be played when the temperature ofthe player returns to normal.

UNPLAYABLE:

The file is unplayable in this audio sys-tem (only MP3 CD).

Compact Disc with MP3Terms:

● MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving PicturesExperts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is themost well-known compressed digital audiofile format. This format allows for near “CDquality” sound, but at a fraction of the size ofnormal audio files. MP3 conversion of anaudio track from CD-ROM can reduce thefile size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with

virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3compression removes the redundant andirrelevant parts of a sound signal that thehuman ear doesn’t hear.

● Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number ofbits per second used by a digital music file.The size and quality of a compressed digitalaudio file is determined by the bit rate usedwhen encoding the file.

● Sampling frequency — Sampling frequencyis the rate at which the samples of a signalare converted from analog to digital (A/Dconversion) per second.

● ID3 tag — The ID3 tag is the part of theencoded MP3 file that contains informationabout the digital music file such as song title,artist, album title, encoding bit rate, tracktime duration, etc. ID3 tag information isdisplayed on the Album/Artist/Track title lineon the display.



Playback order:

Playback order of the CD with compressed files(MP3) is as illustrated.

● The names of folders not containing MP3files are not shown in the display.

● If there is a file in the top level of the disc,“ROOT” is displayed.

● The playback order is the order in which thefiles were written by the writing software.Therefore, the files might not play in thedesired order.

Playback order chartWHA0543



Specification chart:

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supportedversions*

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512

Text character number limitation 31 characters

Displayable character codes01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:(UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.



Troubleshooting guide:

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for folder namesand file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Poor sound qualityCheck if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long timebefore the music startsplaying.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3 disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.

Music cuts off or skipsThe writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match thespecifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit ratefiles

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to thenext song when playing

When a non-MP3 file has been given an extension of “.MP3” or “.mp3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there will be approximately 5seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back inthe desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.



1. pause/mute button2. CD insert slot3. CD eject button4. MIX/RPT button5. CLOCK DISP button

6. TUNE (CATEGORY) button7. AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,

Fade, Balance, SSV (if so equipped),Beep and Language)

8. AUX jack

9. POWER/VOLUME control knob10. SCAN button11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons12. SEEK (CHANNEL) button13. RADIO button14. CD/AUX button15. PRESET A·B·C button

*No satellite radio reception is availableand “NO SAT” is displayed when theSAT button is pressed unless optionalsatellite receiver and antenna areinstalled, and an XMT or SIRIUS™ satel-lite radio service subscription is active.Satellite radio not available in Alaska,Hawaii and Guam.

Type ALHA0678



1. CD LOAD button2. CD insert slot3. CD eject button4. MIX/RPT button5. CLOCK DISP button

6. TUNE (CAT·FOLDER) button7. AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,

Fade, Balance, SSV (if so equipped),Beep and Language)

8. AUX jack

9. POWER/VOLUME control knob10. SCAN button11. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons12. SEEK (CH·FILE) button13. RADIO button14. CD/AUX button15. PRESET A·B·C button


FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER(Type A)/CD CHANGER (Type B)

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-tion precautions9 earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

Type BLHA0679



Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the POWER/VOLUME control knob whilethe system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)which was playing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press thePOWER/VOLUME control knob.

Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO button (Bass, Mid, Treble,Fade, Balance, SSV, Beep andLanguage):

Press the AUDIO button to change themode as follows:

Bass → Mid → Treble → Fade → Balance →Speed Sense Volume (if so equipped) → BeepON/OFF → Language → Audio or OFF → Bass

To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance, pressthe AUDIO button until the desired modeappears in the display. Press the TUNE button toadjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You

can also use the TUNE button to adjust Faderand Balance modes. Fader adjusts the soundlevel between the front and rear speakers andBalance adjusts the sound between the right andleft speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LEVEL1 toLEVEL5 press the TUNE button left or right.

To change the Beep to ON or OFF, press theTUNE button left or right. This will enable ordisable the beep sound heard during menu se-lection.

To change the Language to English or Français,press the TUNE button left or right.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO button re-peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.Otherwise, the radio or CD display will automati-cally reappear after about 5 seconds.

CLOCK DISP (display) button:

The CLOCK DISP (display) button will show textinformation about CD or MP3 and SAT (satellite,if so equipped) in the audio display.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the CLOCK DISP button. TheCLOCK DISP button will allow you to scroll

through CD text as follows: Track number andTrack time ←→ Album title ←→ Song title.

● Track number displays the track number se-lected on the disc.

● Track time displays the amount of time thetrack has played.

● Album title displays the title of the CD beingplayed.

● Song title displays the title of the selectedCD track.

MP3 display mode (Type B only)

To change the text displayed when listening to aCD with MP3s and ID3 tags, press the CLOCKDISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scrollthrough the CD text as follows: Disc number,Track number and Folder number ←→ Folder title←→ Album title ←→ Artist name ←→ Song title.

● Disc number displays the number of thecurrent disc playing.

● Track number displays the number of thetrack playing on the selected disc.

● Folder number displays the number of thecurrent folder on the MP3 CD.

● Folder title displays the title of the folder.



● Album title displays the title of the album ofthe song playing.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist ofthe song playing.

● Song title displays the title of the song play-ing.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the CLOCKDISP button. The CLOCK DISP button will scrollthrough the broadcast information as follows:Channel number ←→ Category name ←→Channel name ←→ Artist name ←→ Song title.

● Channel number displays the channel num-ber of the selected satellite radio station.

● Category name displays the category nameof the selected satellite radio station.

● Channel name displays the channel name ofthe selected satellite radio station.

● Artist name displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Song title displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

Clock operation

Pressing the CLOCK DISP button displays theclock with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCKDISP button again to turn off the clock display.

For additional information on setting the clock,see “Adjusting the time” earlier in this section.

pause/mute button (Type A only):

To mute or pause the audio sound, pressthe pause/mute button.

Press the button again to resume the audiosound.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the RADIO button will change the bandas follows:

AM ←→ FM ←→ SAT (Satellite, if so equipped)

When the RADIO button is pressed while theignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, theradio will come on at the station last played.

No satellite radio reception is available when theRADIO button is pressed to access satellite radiostations unless optional satellite receiver and an-tenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™ sat-ellite radio service subscription is active. Satellite

radio can only be installed in vehicles that werefactory pre-wired for satellite radio. Satellite radiois not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam. Ifsatellite radio is not operational then the RADIObutton is used to toggle between AM and FMbands.

If a compact disc is playing when the RADIObutton is pressed, the compact disc will auto-matically be turned off and the last radio stationplayed will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE (tuning):

To manually tune the radio, press the TUNEbutton or .

To move quickly through the channels, hold eitherthe or button down for more than1.5 seconds.

SEEK (tuning):

Press the SEEK button or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to tune from high to low or lowto high frequencies and stop at the next broad-casting station.



SCAN (tuning):

Press the SCAN button for more than 1.5seconds to stop at each broadcasting station for5 seconds. Pressing the button again during this5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and theradio will remain tuned to that station. If theSCAN button is not pushed within 5 seconds,SCAN tuning moves to the next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) player operation(Type A)

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with the

label side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing.

If the radio is already operating, it will automati-cally turn off and the compact disc will play.

If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing thePOWER/VOLUME control knob will start thecompact disc.

CD/AUX button:

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded but the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

TUNE (Rewind and FastForward):

When the TUNE button (rewind) or(fast forward) is pressed while the compact discis being played, the compact disc will play whilerewinding or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc will return to normalplay speed.



SEEK:

When the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing,the track being played returns to its beginning.Press several times to skip back through tracks.The compact disc will go back the number oftimes the button is pressed.

When the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing,the next track will start to play from its beginning.Press several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of timesthe button is pressed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

MIX/RPT (mix and repeat):

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

Repeat All → Repeat Track → Mix All Tracks →Repeat All

Repeat All: the entire disc will be repeatedRepeat Track: the current track will be repeatedMix All Tracks: all tracks will be played randomly

SCAN button:

While listening to a CD, press the SCANbutton to preview the first 10 seconds of eachtrack on the CD playing. Pressing theSCAN button again during this 10 second periodstops the scan and the CD remains on that track.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-log audio input such as from a portable cassettetape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.

Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

CD EJECT:

When the button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded, the compact disc will beejected.

When button is pressed while the com-pact disc is being played, the compact disc willeject and the system will turn off.

CD IN indicator:

CD IN indicator appears on the display when theCD is loaded with the system on.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation(Type B only)

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will beguided automatically into the slot and start play-ing. To insert the disc, first press the but-ton.


If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing the POWERbutton will start the compact disc.

Do not use 3.1 in (8 cm) diameter compact discsin the CD changer.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press the loadbutton for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pressing the CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press theload button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.



CD/AUX button:

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with thesystem off and the compact disc loaded, thesystem will turn on and the compact disc will startto play.

When the CD/AUX button is pressed with thecompact disc loaded but the radio playing, theradio will automatically be turned off and thecompact disc will start to play.

TUNE (Rewind and FastForward):

When the TUNE button (rewind) or(fast forward) is pressed while the compact discis being played, the compact disc will play whilerewinding or fast forwarding. When the button isreleased, the compact disc will return to normalplay speed.

TUNE (CAT•FOLDER):

While playing an MP3, press the TUNEbutton or to scan forward or back-ward through available folders.

To fast forward or rewind through an audio track,press the TUNE button or for morethan 1.5 seconds.

SEEK:

When the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD isplaying, the track or file being played returns to itsbeginning. Press several times to skip backthrough tracks or files. The CD or MP3 CD will goback the number of times the button is pressed.

When the SEEK button is pressed for lessthan 1.5 seconds while a CD or MP3 CD isplaying, the next track or file will start to play fromits beginning. Press several times to skip throughtracks or files. The CD or MP3 CD will advancethe number of times the button is pressed. Whenthe last track or file on the CD or MP3 CD isskipped through, the first track or file will beplayed. If there are multiple CDs in the CDchanger, when the last track or file is skippedthrough, the next CD will start to play.

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

MIX/RPT button:

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while thecompact disc is being played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

Repeat All → Repeat Disc → Repeat Track → MixAll Discs → Mix Disc → Repeat All

Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.Repeat Track: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated.Mix All Disc: Tracks from all discs will be playedrandomly.Mix Disc: Tracks from the disc that is currentlyplaying will be played randomly.Repeat All: All discs will be played normally, withno special play pattern enabled.

MP3 MIX/RPT mode:

When the MIX/RPT button is pressed while anMP3 compact disc is being played, the playpattern can be changed as follows:

Repeat All → Repeat Disc → Repeat Folder →Repeat Track → Mix All Disc → Mix Disc → MixFolder → Repeat All

Repeat Disc: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.Repeat Folder: The folder selected that is cur-rently playing will be repeated.Repeat Track: The track that is currently playingwill be repeated.Mix All Disc: Tracks from all discs will be playedrandomly.Mix Disc: Tracks from the disc that is currentlyplaying will be played randomly.Mix Folder: Tracks from that folder that is cur-rently accessed will be played randomly.



Repeat All: All discs will be played normally, withno special play pattern enabled.

SCAN button:

While listening to a CD, press the SCANbutton to preview the first 10 seconds of eachtrack on the CD playing. Pressing theSCAN button again during this 10 second periodstops the scan and the CD remains on that track.

MP3 SCAN mode:

While listening to an MP3 CD, press theSCAN button to preview the first 10 seconds ofeach file in the current folder. The scan will con-tinue on to the next folder and files if there is morethan one folder on the MP3 CD. Pressingthe SCAN button again during this 10second period stops the scan and the MP3 CDremains in that folder.

CD/AUX (Auxiliary) button:

The AUX jack is located on the CD player. TheAUX audio input jack accepts any standard ana-log audio input such as from a portable cassettetape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop computers.

Press the CD/AUX button to play a compatibledevice when it is plugged into the AUX jack.

CD EJECT:

Current disc:

● Press the slot number (1 – 6) for the desireddisc, then press the button. The com-pact disc will be ejected. If the disc is notremoved within 15 seconds, the disc willreload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.



1. SEEK/TRACK button2. TUNE/FOLDER·CAT button3. SCAN/RPT button4. DISP button5. PRESET A·B·C button6. CD button

7. FM button8. AM button9. SAT* button10. AUX button11. LOAD button12. CD insert slot

13. CD eject button14. POWER/VOLUME control knob15. Station and CD select (1 - 6) buttons16. TUNE/TRACK and AUDIO control knob

(BASS, MID, TREBLE, FADE, BAL-ANCE and SSV (if so equipped))


FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITHCOMPACT DISC (CD) CHANGER

For all operation precautions, see 9Audio opera-tion precautions9 earlier in this section.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed, and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

LHA0680



Audio main operation

POWER/VOLUME control:

Turn the ignition key to ACC or ON, and thenpress the POWER/VOLUME control knob whilethe system is off to call up the mode (radio or CD)which was playing immediately before the systemwas turned off.

To turn the system off, press thePOWER/VOLUME control knob.

Turn the POWER/VOLUME control knob to ad-just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. The audio volumechanges as the driving speed changes.

AUDIO knob (BASS, MIDRANGE, TREBLE,FADE, BALANCE and SSV if so equipped):

Press the AUDIO knob to change the mode asfollows:

BASS → MID → TREBLE → FADE → BALANCE→ SSV (if so equipped)

To adjust Bass, Mid (Midrange), Treble, Fade andBalance, press the AUDIO knob until the desiredmode appears in the display. Turn the Tuningknob to adjust Bass and Treble to the desiredlevel. You can also use the Tuning knob to adjustFader and Balance modes. Fader adjusts the

sound level between the front and rear speakersand Balance adjusts the sound between the rightand left speakers.

To change the SSV mode to OFF, LOW, MID orHIGH, turn the Tuning knob to the right or left.

Once you have adjusted the sound quality to thedesired level, press the AUDIO knob repeatedlyuntil the radio or CD display reappears. Other-wise, the radio or CD display will automaticallyreappear after about 10 seconds.

DISP (display) button:

The DISP (display) button will show text aboutFM stations, CD or MP3 and SAT (satellite, if soequipped) information in the audio display.

FM display mode

To change the text displayed while listening to anFM station that broadcasts with Radio Data Sys-tem (RDS), press the DISP button. The DISPbutton will allow you to change RDS informationas follows: Station call number → Program type→ Station information → Station call number.

● Station call number displays the radio fre-quency number of the station.

● Program type displays the type or categoryof radio station.

● Station information displays information theradio station wants to broadcast.

For additional information, see “Radio data sys-tem (RDS)” later in this section.

CD display mode

To change the text displayed while playing a CDwith text, press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill allow you to scroll through CD text as follows:Disc title, Track title ←→ Disc title ←→ Track title.

● Track title mode displays the title of the se-lected CD track.

● Disc title mode displays the title of the CDbeing played.

MP3 display mode

To change the text displayed when listening to anMP3 with MP3 text (when CD with text is beingused), press the DISP button. The DISP buttonwill scroll through the CD text as follows: Foldertitle, Artist name, Track title ←→ Folder title ←→Artist name ←→ Track title.

To change the default display mode press theAUDIO knob repeatedly until DISPLAY MODEappears on the display, then rotate the knob toselect the following display modes: Disc number←→ Folder number.



Once a display mode is selected press the AU-DIO knob again to store the setting.

● Folder number mode displays the foldernumber and the file number of the foldercurrently being played.

● Disc number mode displays the number se-lected disc and the track that is currentlybeing played.

Display satellite radio display mode (if soequipped)

To change the text displayed when listening tosatellite radio (if so equipped) press the DISPbutton. The DISP button will scroll through thebroadcast information as follows: Name ←→Title ←→ Current display mode.

To change the default display mode press theAUDIO button to display mode and press theTUNE button to select the following displaymodes: Channel number ←→ Channel name←→ Name ←→ Title. Once the display mode isselected press the AUDIO button again to storethe setting. If the AUDIO button is not pressedafter 8 seconds the display will refresh with thelast selected display mode setting.

● Channel number mode displays the channelnumber of the selected satellite radio sta-tion.

● Channel name mode displays the channelname of the selected satellite radio station.

● Name mode displays the name of the artist,host or weather condition of the selectedsatellite radio station.

● Title mode displays the song title, showname, or temperature of the selected satel-lite radio station.

FM/AM/SAT radio operationFM/AM/SAT band select:

Pressing the FM, AM or SAT radio select buttonwill change the band to either FM, AM or SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio stations.

When the FM, AM or SAT radio select button ispressed while the ignition switch is in the ACC orON position, the radio will come on at the stationlast played.

The last station played will also come on whenthe POWER/VOLUME control knob is pressedon.

No satellite radio reception is available and “NOSAT” is displayed when the SAT button ispressed unless optional satellite receiver andantenna are installed and an XMT or SIRIUS™satellite radio service subscription is active. Sat-ellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii andGuam.

If a compact disc is playing when the FM, AM orSAT radio select button is pushed, the compactdisc will automatically be turned off and the lastradio station played will come on.

The FM stereo indicator ST will glow during FMstereo reception. When the stereo broadcastsignal is weak, the radio will automatically changefrom stereo to monaural reception.

TUNE/FOLDER·CAT(Tuning):

To manually tune the radio, press theTUNE/FOLDER·CAT button or orturn the tuning knob to right or left.

To move quickly through the channels, hold eitherthe or button down for more than1.5 seconds.

SEEK/TRACK tuning:

Press the SEEK/TRACK button orfor less than 1.5 seconds to tune from high to lowor low to high frequencies and stop at the nextbroadcasting station.

To seek quickly through the channels, press andhold the SEEK/TRACK button for more than 1.5seconds. When the button is released the radiowill seek to the next broadcasting station.



SCAN/RPT tuning:

Press the SCAN/RPT button for more than 1.5seconds to stop at each broadcasting station(AM, FM or SAT, if so equipped) for 5 seconds.Pressing the button again during this 5 secondperiod will stop SCAN tuning and the radio willremain tuned to that station. If the SCAN/RPTbutton is not pressed within 5 seconds, SCANtuning moves to the next station.

PRESET A·B·C (Station memory opera-tions):

18 stations can be set for the FM, AM and SAT(satellite, if so equipped) radio to the A, B and Cpreset button in any combination of FM, AM orSAT stations.

1. Choose preset bank A, B or C using thePRESET A·B·C select button.

2. Select the desired FM, AM or SAT stationband.

3. Tune to the desired station using manual,SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold anyof the desired station memory buttons (1 –6) until a beep sound is heard.

4. The channel indicator will then come on andthe sound will resume. Programming is nowcomplete.

5. Other buttons can be set in the same man-ner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuseopens, the radio memory will be canceled. In thatcase, reset the desired stations.

Radio data system (RDS):

RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a datainformation service transmitted by some radiostations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, butmany stations are now considering broadcastingRDS data.

RDS can display:

● Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.

● Station name, such as “The Groove”.

● Music or programming type such as “Clas-sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.

● Artist and song information.

If the station broadcasts RDS information, theRDS icon is displayed.

Compact disc (CD) changer operation

Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON positionand insert the compact disc into the slot with thelabel side facing up. The compact disc will be

guided automatically into the slot and start play-ing. To insert the disc, first press the LOADbutton.


If the system has been turned off while the com-pact disc was playing, pressing thePOWER/VOLUME control knob will start thecompact disc.

LOAD button:

To insert a CD in the CD changer, press theLOAD button for less than 1.5 seconds. Selectthe loading slot by pressing the CD insert selectbutton (1 – 6), then insert the CD.

To insert 6 CDs to the CD changer, press theLOAD button for more than 1.5 seconds.

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate on thedisplay when CDs are loaded into the changer.

CD button:

When the CD button is pressed with the systemoff and the compact disc loaded, the system willturn on and the compact disc will start to play.

When the CD button is pressed with the com-pact disc loaded with the radio playing, the radiowill automatically be turned off and the compactdisc will start to play.



TUNE/FOLDER·CAT:

While playing an MP3, press theTUNE/FOLDER·CAT button or toscan backward or forward through available fold-ers.

When the or button is pressed formore than 1.5 seconds while a CD is playing, theCD plays at an increased speed while rewindingor fast forwarding through the existing track be-ing played. When the button is released the CDreturns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK:

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while a compact disc is playing, thetrack being played returns to its beginning. Pressseveral times to skip back through tracks. Thecompact disc will go back the number of timesthe button is pressed.

When the button is pressed for less than1.5 seconds while the compact disc is playing,the next track will start to play from its beginning.Press several times to skip through tracks. Thecompact disc will advance the number of timesthe button is pressed. (When the last track on thecompact disc is skipped through, the first trackwill be played.)

CD select buttons:

To play another CD that has been loaded, press aCD select button (1 – 6).

SCAN/RPT:

When the SCAN/RPT play button is pushedwhile the compact disc is played, the play patterncan be changed as follows:

ALL DISC RPT → 1 DISC RPT→ 1 TRACK RPT→ ALL DISC RDM → 1 DISC RDM → ALL DISCRPT

ALL DISC RPT: All discs loaded will be repeated.1 DISC RPT: The disc that is currently playing willbe repeated.1 TRACK RPT: The track that is currently playingwill be repeatedALL DISC RDM: Tracks from all discs will beplayed randomly1 DISC RDM: Tracks from the disc that is cur-rently playing will be played randomly

CD EJECT:

Current disc:

● Press the button for less than 1.5seconds. Then press one of the CD select (1– 6) buttons for the selected CD to beejected. If one of the CD select (1 – 6)buttons are not pressed within 1.5 seconds

the current loaded CD will be ejected. If thedisc is not removed within 15 seconds, thedisc will reload.

All discs:

● Press and hold the button for morethan 1.5 seconds. The compact discs will beejected one by one. If a disc is not removedwithin 15 seconds, or the button ispressed again during the eject sequence,the entire disc eject sequence will be can-celed.

When this button is pressed while the compactdisc is being played, the compact disc will ejectand the last source will be played.

CD IN indicator:

The slot numbers (1 – 6) will illuminate if CDshave been loaded into the changer in CD modeonly.



AUX jack (if so equipped)

The AUX jack s1 is located below the air condi-tioner controls. The AUX audio input jack acceptsany standard analog audio input such as from aportable cassette tape player, MP3 player orlaptop computers.

Press the AUX button to play a compatible devicewhen it is plugged into the AUX jack.

CD CARE AND CLEANING● Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the

disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.

● Always place the discs in the storage casewhen they are not being used.

● To clean a disc, wipe the surface from thecenter to the outer edge using a clean, softcloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circularmotion.

● Do not use a conventional record cleaner oralcohol intended for industrial use.

● A new disc may be rough on the inner andouter edges. Remove the rough edges byrubbing the inner and outer edges with theside of a pen or pencil as illustrated.

LHA0683 LHA0049



1. Volume control switch2. MODE select switch3. POWER on/off switch4. Tuning switch

1. Volume control switch2. Phone operation switch3. POWER on and MODE select switch4. Tuning switch

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FORAUDIO CONTROLThe audio system can be operated using thecontrols on the steering wheel.

POWER on/off switchWith the ignition key turned to the ACC or ONposition, push the POWER switch to turn theaudio system on or off.

If you have the Type B switch, with the ignition keyturned to the ACC or ON position push theMODE switch to turn the audio system on.

MODE select switch

Push the mode select switch to change the modein the following sequence: Preset A → Preset B→ Preset C → CD → AUX.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch up or down toincrease or decrease the volume.

Tuning

Memory change (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) for lessthan 1.5 seconds to change presets.

Seek tuning (radio):

Push the tuning switch ( or ) formore than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previ-ous radio station.

Next/Previous track (CD):

Push the tuning switch or for lessthan 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of thepresent track or skip to the next track. Pushseveral times to skip back or skip through tracks.

Type AWHA0611

Type BWHA0612



Change disc (CD) (if so equipped):

Push the SEEK tuning switch or formore than 1.5 seconds to change the playingdisc up or down.

ANTENNA

Window antennaThe antenna pattern is printed inside the rearwindow.

CAUTION

● Do not place metalized film near therear window glass or attach any metalparts to it. This may cause poor recep-tion or noise.

● When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the rear window antenna.Lightly wipe along the antenna with adampened soft cloth.

When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone inyour NISSAN, be sure to observe the followingprecautions, otherwise the new equipment mayadversely affect the engine control system andother electronic parts.

WARNING

● A cellular telephone should not be usedwhile driving so full attention may begiven to vehicle operation. Some juris-dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-phones while driving.

● If you must make a call while your ve-hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-lar phone operational mode (if soequipped) is highly recommended. Ex-ercise extreme caution at all times sofull attention may be given to vehicleoperation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

● Keep the antenna as far away as pos-sible from the electronic controlmodules.

● Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in(20 cm) away from the electronic con-trol system harnesses. Do not route theantenna wire next to any harness.

● Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratioas recommended by the manufacturer.

● Connect the ground wire from the CBradio chassis to the body.

● For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO



WARNING

● Use a phone after stopping your vehiclein a safe location. If you have to use aphone while driving, exercise extremecaution at all times so full attention maybe given to vehicle operation.

● If a conversation in a moving vehiclerequires you to take notes, pull off theroad to a safe location and stop yourvehicle before doing so.

CAUTION

To avoid draining the vehicle battery, usea phone after starting the engine.

Your NISSAN is equipped with the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System. If you are an ownerof a BluetoothT enabled cellular phone, you canset up the wireless connection between yourcellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.With BluetoothT wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone call withyour cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is paired to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connect-ing procedure is required. Your phone is auto-matically connected with the in-vehicle phone

WHA0614

BLUETOOTHT HANDS-FREE PHONESYSTEM (if so equipped)



module when the ignition switch is turned to theON position with the paired cellular phone turnedon and carried in the vehicle.

You can register up to 5 different BluetoothTcellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.However, you can talk on only one cellular phoneat a time.

Before using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem, refer to the following notes.

● Set up the wireless connection between acellular phone and the in-vehicle phonemodule before using the hands-free phonesystem.

● Some BluetoothT enabled cellular phonesmay not be recognized by the in-vehiclephone module. Please visit www.nissan-usa.com/bluetooth for a recommendedphone list.

● You will not be able to use a hands-freephone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-vice area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it isdifficult to receive radio waves; such as ina tunnel, in an underground parking ga-rage, near a tall building or in a mountain-ous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent itfrom being dialed.

When the radio wave condition is not ideal orambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult tohear the other person’s voice during a call.

Do not place the cellular phone in an area sur-rounded by metal or far away from the in-vehiclephone module to prevent tone quality degrada-tion and wireless connection disruption.

While a cellular phone is connected through theBluetoothT wireless connection, the batterypower of the cellular phone may dischargequicker than usual.

If the hands-free phone system seems to bemalfunctioning, please refer to “Troubleshootingguide” later in this section. You can also visitwww.nissan-usa.com/bluetooth for trouble-shooting help.

Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual re-garding the telephone charges, cellular phoneantenna and body, etc.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) this device maynot cause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interference re-ceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.

FCC Radiation Exposure Statement:

This equipment complies with FCC radiation ex-posure limits set forth for an uncontrolled envi-ronment. This equipment should be installed andoperated with minimum distance of 8 inches (20cm) between the radiator and your body. ThisTransmitter must not be co-located or operatingin conjunction with any other antenna or transmit-ter.

USING THE SYSTEM

The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allowshands-free operation of the BluetoothT PhoneSystem.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands maynot be available so full attention may be given tovehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is turned to the ONposition, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,which takes a few seconds. When completed,the amber light on the overhead console illumi-nates and the system is ready to accept voicecommands. If the button is pressed beforethe initialization completes, the system will an-nounce “Hands-free phone system not ready”and will not react to voice commands.



Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the NISSANVoice Recognition system, observe the following:

● Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet aspossible. Close the windows to eliminatesurrounding noises (traffic noises, vibrationsounds, etc.), which may prevent the systemfrom recognizing voice commands correctly.

● Wait until the tone sounds before speaking acommand. Otherwise, the command will notbe received properly.

● Start speaking a command within 5 secondsafter the tone sounds.

● Speak in a natural voice without pausingbetween words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, pressand release the button located on thesteering wheel. The light on the overhead con-sole flashes to signal you have entered a voicerecognition (VR) session. After the tone sounds,speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the micro-phone, and voice feedback is given when thecommand is accepted.

● If you need to hear the available commandsfor the current menu again, say “Help” andthe system will repeat them.

● If a command is not recognized, the systemannounces, “Command not recognized.Please try again.” Repeat the command in aclear voice.

● If you want to go back to the previous com-mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-tion” any time the system is waiting for aresponse.

● You can cancel a command when the sys-tem is waiting for a response by saying,“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You canalso press the button on the steeringwheel at any time. Whenever the VR sessionis cancelled, a double beep is played toindicate you have exited the system.

● If you want to adjust the volume of the voicefeedback, press the volume control switches(+ or -) on the steering wheel while beingprovided with feedback. You can also usethe radio volume control knob.

How to say numbers

NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certainway to speak numbers in voice commands. Referto the following rules and examples.

● Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh six six two six two ohoh”, or

– “One eight zero zero six six two six two ohoh”

● Words can be used for the first 4 digitsplaces only.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight hundred six six two six two ohoh”,

– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixtytwo hundred, and

– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty twohundred.

● Numbers can be spoken in small groups.The system will prompt you to continue en-tering digits, if desired.

Example: 1-800-662-6200

– “One eight oh oh”

The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six six two”



The system repeats the numbers andprompts you to enter more.

– “six two oh oh”

● You can say “Star” for * and “Pound” for # atany time in any position of the phone num-ber.

Example: 1-555-1212 *123

– “One five five five one two one two starone two three”

NOTE:

For best results, say phone numbers assingle digits.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steeringwheel.

PHONE/SENDPress the button to initiate a VRsession or answer an incoming call.

You can also use the button toskip through system feedback and toenter commands during a call. See “Listof voice commands” and “During a call”later in this section for more information.

PHONE/ENDPress the button to cancel a VRsession or end a call.

GETTING STARTEDThe following procedures will help you getstarted using the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-ditional command options, refer to “List of voicecommands” later in this section.

Choosing a languageYou can interact with the BluetoothT Hands-FreePhone System using English, Spanish or French.

To change the language, perform the following.

1. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

2. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.”

3. Press the button.

For information on speaker adaptation, see“Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” later in thissection.

WHA0615



4. The system announces the current languageand gives you the option to change the lan-guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (inFrench). Use the following chart to selectthe language.

NOTE:

Note: You must press the button orthe button within 5 seconds tochange the language.

Currentlanguage

Press(PHONE/SEND)

to select

Press(PHONE/END)

to select

English Spanish French

Spanish English French

French English Spanish

5. If you decide not to change the language, donot press either button. After 5 seconds, theVR session will end, and the language willnot be changed.

Pairing procedure

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled.

Main Menu“Setup” sA

“Pair Phone” sB“New Phone” sC

Initiate from handset sDName phone sE

Assign priority sF

Choose ringtone sG

1. Press the button on the steeringwheel. The system announces the availablecommands.

2. Say: “Setup” sA . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say: “Pair phone” sB . The system acknowl-edges the command and announces thenext set of available commands.

4. Say: “New phone” sC . The system acknowl-edges the command and asks you to initiatepairing from the phone handset sD .

The pairing procedure of the cellular phonevaries according to each cellular phonemanufacturer. See the cellular phone Own-er’s Manual for details. You can also visitwww.nissan-usa.com/bluetooth for instruc-tions on pairing NISSAN recommended cel-lular phones.

When prompted for a PIN code, enter“1234” from the handset. The PIN code“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN andcannot be changed.

5. The system asks you to say a name for thephone sE .

If the name is too long or too short, thesystem tells you, then prompts you for aname again.

Also, if more than one phone is paired andthe name sounds too much like a namealready used, the system tells you, thenprompts you for a name again.



6. The system asks you to assign a priority levelsF . The priority level determines whichphone is active when more than one pairedBluetoothT phone is in the vehicle. Followthe instructions provided by the system orrefer to “Setup” later in this section for moreinformation on changing priorities.

7. The system will ask if you would like to selecta custom ring tone sG . Follow the instruc-tions provided by the system or refer to“Setup” later in this section for more infor-mation on selecting ringtones.

Making a call by entering a phonenumber

Main Menu“Call” sA

Number (speak digits) sB“Dial” sC

1. Press the button on steering wheel. Atone will sound.

2. Say: “Call” sA . The system acknowledgesthe command and announces the next set ofavailable commands.

3. Say the number you wish to call sB . Forexample, 555-1212 can be said as “five fivefive one two one two.” See “How to saynumbers” earlier in this section for moreinformation.

4. When you have finished speaking the phonenumber, the system repeats it back and an-nounces the available commands.

5. Say: “Dial” sC . The system acknowledgesthe command and makes the call.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

Receiving a callWhen you hear the ring tone, press thebutton on the steering wheel.

Once the call has ended, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

NOTE:

If you do not wish to take the call when youhear the ring tone, press the buttonon the steering wheel.

For additional command options, see “List ofvoice commands” later in this section.

LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS

Main Menu“Call”“Phone Book”“Memo Pad”“Setup”

When you press and release the button onthe steering wheel, you can choose from thecommands on the Main Menu. The followingpages describe these commands and the com-mands in each sub-menu.

Remember to wait for the tone beforespeaking.

You can say “Help” to hear the list of commandscurrently available any time the system is waitingfor a response.

If you want to end an action without completing it,you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time thesystem is waiting for a response. The system willend the VR session. Whenever the VR session iscancelled, a double beep is played to indicateyou have exited the system.

If you want to go back to the previous command,you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any timethe system is waiting for a response.



When you get used to the menus in the system,you can talk ahead by saying more than onecommand at a time. For example, say, “Call fivefive five one two one two” or “Memo pad record.”

Also, when you get used to the system re-sponses, you can skip ahead to the tone bypressing the button on the steering wheel.However, if you press the button when thesystem is waiting for a response from you it willend the VR session.

“Call”

Main Menu“Call”

Name (speak name) sANumber (speak digits) sB“Redial” sC“Call Back” sD

Name (speak name) sA

If you have stored entries in the Phone Book, youcan dial a number associated with a name andlocation.

See “Phone book” later in this section to learnhow to store entries.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe phone book entry you wish to call. The systemacknowledges the name.

If there are multiple locations associated with thename, the system asks you to choose the loca-tion.

Once you have confirmed the name and location,the system begins the call.

Number (speak digits) sB

When prompted by the system, say the numberyou wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”and “Making a call by entering a phone number”earlier in this section for more details.

“Redial” sC

Use the Redial command to call the last numberthat was dialed within the vehicle.

NOTE:

The system will not redial the last numberdialed by the handset keypad.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a redial number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to redial” andends the VR session.

“Call back” sD

Use the Call Back command to dial the number ofthe last incoming call within the vehicle.

The system acknowledges the command, re-peats the number and begins dialing.

If a call back number does not exist, the systemannounces, “There is no number to call back”andends the VR session.

During a call

During a call there are several command optionsavailable. Press the button on the steeringwheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-mands.

● “Help” — The system announces the avail-able commands.

● “Go back/Correction” — The system an-nounces “Go back,” ends the VR sessionand returns to the call.

● “Cancel/Quit” — The system announces“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returnsto the call.

● “Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Sendcommand to enter numbers during a call. Forexample, if you were directed to dial an ex-tension by an automated system:

Say: “Send one two three four.”

The system acknowledges the commandand sends the tones associated with thenumbers. The system then ends the VR ses-



sion and returns to the call.

● “Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-mand to transfer the call from the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System to the cellularphone when privacy is desired.

The system announces, “Transfer call. Calltransferred to privacy mode.” The systemthen ends the VR session.

You can also issue the Transfer Call com-mand again to return to a hands-free callthrough the vehicle.

● “Mute” — Use the Mute command to muteyour voice so the other party cannot hear it.Use the mute command again to unmuteyour voice.

NOTE:

If a call is ended or the cellular phonenetwork connection is lost while the Mutefeature is on, the Mute feature will be resetto “off” for the next call so the other partycan hear your voice.

“Phone book”

NOTE:

Phone book commands are not availablewhen the vehicle is moving.

Main Menu“Phone Book”

“New Entry” sA“Edit” sB“Delete” sC9List Names” sD

The Phone Book stores up to 40 names for eachphone paired with the system. Each name canhave up to 4 locations/phone numbers associ-ated with it.

NOTE:

Each phone has its own separate phonebook. You cannot access Phone A’s phonebook if you are currently connected withPhone B.

“New entry” sA

Use the New Entry command to store a newname in the system.

When prompted by the system, say the name youwould like to give the new entry.

For example, say: “Mary.”If the name is too long or too short, the systemtells you, then prompts you for a name again.

Also, if the name sounds too much like a namealready stored, the system tells you, then promptsyou for a name again.

Once the system accepts the name and youconfirm it is correct, the system asks for a location(Home, Office, Mobile or Other).

For example, say: “Home.”The system acknowledges the location and asksfor a number.

For example, say: “five five five one twoone two.” See “How to say numbers”earlier in this section for moreinformation.



The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber. The system then asks if you would like tostore another location for the same name. If youdo not wish to store another location, the systemends the VR session.

“Edit” sB

Use the Edit command to alter an existing phonebook entry or to add a 2nd, 3rd or 4th phonenumber to an existing entry.

When prompted by the system, say the name ofthe entry you wish to edit.

The system acknowledges the name and asksyou for the location you would like to edit.

Say the name of the location. The system ac-knowledges and asks you for the phone numberyou would like to store with this location.

See “How to say numbers” earlier in this sectionfor more information.

The system repeats the number and prompts youfor the next command. When you have finishedentering numbers, choose “Store.”

The system confirms the name, location andnumber, then announces that the entry has beenstored. The system then ends the VR session.

“Delete” sC

Use the Delete command to erase one entry fromthe phone book, all entries from the phone book,the current redial number or the current call backnumber.

To delete entries from the phone book, say aname or “All entries” when prompted by the sys-tem.

The system acknowledges the command andasks you to confirm the deletion.

To delete the current redial number or call backnumber, say “redial number” or “call back num-ber” when prompted by the system.

If a redial number or a call back number exists, thesystem deletes them without asking for confirma-tion.

If there is no number for the entry you are trying todelete, the system says so and ends the VRsession.

“List names” sD

Use the List Names command to hear all thenames and locations in the phone book.

The system recites the phone book entries butdoes not include the actual phone numbers.When the playback of the list is complete thesystem ends the VR session.

You can stop the playback of the list at any timeby pressing the button on the steeringwheel. The system ends the VR session.

“Memo pad”

Main Menu

“Memo Pad”

“Record” sA

“Play” sB

“Delete” sC

The Memo Pad records a maximum of 3 voicememos, each up to 20 seconds long.

“Record” sA

The system announces “Recording” and a tonesounds signaling you to begin.

Speak the information you wish to record clearly.When you are done, press the orbutton on the steering wheel.

A tone sounds and the system announces“Memo recorded.” Another tone sounds to endthe VR session.



If the memo pad is full, the system asks if you wishto record over the oldest memo.

“Play” sB

The system plays back all the memos in the orderof newest to oldest. The system ends the VRsession.

If there are no memos recorded, the system an-nounces “No messages to play.” The systemends the VR session.

“Delete” sC

The Delete command erases all memos. Thesystem asks you to confirm this action beforedeleting all memos.

“Setup”

Main Menu

“Setup”

“Pair Phone” sA

“List Phone” sB

“Select Phone” sC

“Change Priority” sD

“Delete Phone” sE

“Select Ringtone” sF

“Bluetooth Off” sG

Use the Setup command to change options as-sociated with the BluetoothT Hands-Free PhoneSystem.

“Pair phone” sA

Use the Pair Phone command to pair a phone tothe BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System.

NOTE:

The pairing procedure must be performedwhen the vehicle is stationary. If the vehiclestarts moving during the procedure, theprocedure will be cancelled. Also, see“Pairing procedure” earlier in this sectionfor additional information.

Up to 5 phones can be paired. If you try to pair asixth phone, the system announces that you mustfirst delete one phone or replace an existingphone.

If you try to pair a phone that has already beenpaired to your vehicle’s system, the system an-nounces the name the phone is already using.The pairing procedure will then be cancelled.

When prompted by the system, choose from thefollowing commands:

● “New phone” — Refer to “Pairing a phone”earlier in this section.

● “Replace phone” — The system announcesthe names of the phones already paired andasks which you would like to replace.

Once you say the name of the phone youwish to replace, the pairing procedure willbegin. Refer to “Pairing procedure” earlier inthis section.

● “List phone” – See the description below.

“List phone” sB

Use the List Phone command to hear the namesof the phones currently paired. If no phones arepaired, the system announces, “No pairedphones to list.” The system then ends the VRsession.

“Select phone” sC

Use the Select Phone command to select aphone of lesser priority when two or more phonespaired with BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem are in the vehicle at the same time.

The system asks you to name the phone andconfirm the selection.

Once the selection is confirmed, the selectedphone remains active until the ignition switch isturned OFF or you select a new phone.



“Change priority” sD

Use the Change Priority command to change thepriority level of the active phone.

The priority level determines which phone is ac-tive when more than one paired BluetoothTphone is in the vehicle.

The system states the priority level of the activephone and asks for a new priority level (1, 2, 3, 4,5).

If the new priority level is already being used foranother phone, the two phones will swap prioritylevels.

For example, if the current priority levels are:

Priority Level 1 = Phone APriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone C

and you change the priority level of Phone C toLevel 1, then:

Priority Level 1 = Phone CPriority Level 2 = Phone BPriority Level 3 = Phone A

“Delete phone” sE

Use the Delete Phone command to delete aspecific phone or all phones from the BluetoothTHands-Free Phone System.

The system announces the names of the phonesalready paired with the system and their prioritylevel. The system then gives you the option todelete a specific phone, all phones or listen to thelist again.

Once you chose to delete a phone or all phones,the system asks you to confirm this action.

NOTE:

When you delete a phone, the associatedphone book for that phone will also bedeleted.

“Select ringtone” sF

Use the Select Ringtone command to select thetone heard in the vehicle when an incoming call isreceived.

The system announces the name of the activephone and asks you to choose from the followingcommands:

● “Ringtone” — The system plays a ringtoneand asks if you would like to select that tone.If you say no, the system plays the nextringtone available and continues to cyclethrough the ringtones until you select one orquit.

● “Silent” — The system asks you to confirmyour wish to disable the ringtone.

“Bluetooth off” sG

Use the Bluetooth Off command to turn off theBluetoothT Hands-Free Phone System.

When the BluetoothT Hands-Free Phone Sys-tem is off, you will not be able to make or receivecalls using NISSAN Voice Recognition. Also, youwill not have access to the Phone Book.

You can still use the Memo Pad and accessSetup.

SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE

Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-dialect users to train the system to improve rec-ognition accuracy. By repeating a number ofcommands, the users can create a voice model oftheir own voice that is stored in the system. Thesystem is capable of storing a different speakeradaptation model for memory A and memory B.

If memory A is available, the system will usememory A to store the model. If memory A is inuse and memory B is available, the system willuse memory B to store the model. If both of thememory locations are in use, the system will askthe user to select which memory location shouldbe overwritten.

Training procedureThe procedure for training a voice is as follows.



1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quietoutdoor location.

2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-sion in P (Park).

3. Press and hold the button for morethan 5 seconds.

4. The system announces: “Press thePHONE/SEND ( ) button for thehands-free phone system to enter thespeaker adaptation mode or press thePHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-ferent language.

5. Press the button.

For information on selecting a different lan-guage, see “Choosing a language” earlier inthis section.

6. Voice memory A or memory B is selectedautomatically. If both memory locations arealready in use, the system will prompt you tooverwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-vided by the system.

7. When preparation is complete and you areready to begin, the press the button.

8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow theinstructions provided by the system.

9. When training is finished, the system will tellyou an adequate number of phrases havebeen recorded.

10. The system will ask you to say your name.Follow the instructions to register yourname.

11. The system will announce that speaker ad-aptation has been completed and the sys-tem is ready.

The SA mode will stop if:

● The button is pressed for more than 5seconds in SA mode.

● The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.

● The ignition switch is turned to the OFF orLOCK position.

Training phrasesDuring the SA mode, the system instructs thetrainer to say the following phrases. (The systemwill prompt you for each phrase.)

● phone book new entry

● dial three oh four two nine

● delete call back number

● setup pair phone

● memo pad play

● eight pause nine three two pause seven

● delete all entries

● call seven two four zero nine

● phone book delete entry

● memo pad record

● dial star two one seven oh

● Yes

● No

● select ring tone

● dial eight five six nine two

● Bluetooth on

● setup change priority

● call three one nine oh two

● nine seven pause pause three oh eight

● Cancel

● call back number

● call star two zero nine five

● delete phone

● dial eight three zero five one

● Home



● four three pause two nine pause zero

● delete redial number

● phone book list names

● call eight oh five four one

● Correction

● setup change ring tone

● dial seven four oh one eight

● setup main menu

● Delete

● dial nine seven two six six

● memo pad delete

● call seven six three oh one

● go back

● call five six two eight zero

● dial six six four three seven

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

The system should respond correctly to all voicecommands without difficulty. If problems are en-countered, try the following solutions.

Where the solutions are listed by number, tryeach solution in turn, starting with number 1, untilthe problem is resolved.

Symptom Solution

System fails to interpret the command correctly.

1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” earlier in this section.

2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.

3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.

4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is toonoisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.

5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.

6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker adaptation (SA) mode” earlier in this section.

The system consistently selects the wrong entry from thephone book.

1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed byusing the “List Names” command. See “Phone book” earlier in this section.

2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.



5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Three-way catalyst. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Ignition switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Intelligent Key System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Ignition switch positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Nissan vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . . . . . . . . 5-9Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14

Precautions on cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14

Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Increasing fuel economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16Parking/parking on hills. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Traction control system (TCS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-20Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system(if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Rear sonar system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23

Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Anti-freeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Draining of coolant water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24Special winter equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24Engine block heater (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25


WARNING

● Do not leave children or adults whowould normally require the assistanceof others alone in your vehicle. Petsshould also not be left alone. Theycould accidentally injure themselves orothers through inadvertent operation ofthe vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,temperatures in a closed vehicle couldquickly become high enough to causesevere or possibly fatal injuries topeople or animals.

● Closely supervise children when theyare around cars to prevent them fromplaying and becoming locked in thetrunk where they could be seriously in-jured. Keep the car locked, with the rearseatback and trunk lid securely latchedwhen not in use, and prevent children’saccess to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

● Do not breathe exhaust gases; theycontain colorless and odorless carbonmonoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-ous. It can cause unconsciousness ordeath.

● If you suspect that exhaust fumes areentering the vehicle, drive with all win-dows fully open, and have the vehicleinspected immediately.

● Do not run the engine in closed spacessuch as a garage.

● Do not park the vehicle with the enginerunning for any extended length of time.

● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,otherwise exhaust gases could bedrawn into the passenger compart-ment. If you must drive with the trunk lidopen, follow these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-ton to off and the fan control dial tohigh to circulate the air.

● If electrical wiring or other cable con-nections must pass to a trailer throughthe seal on the trunk lid or the body,follow the manufacturer’s recommen-dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-try into the vehicle.

● The exhaust system and body should beinspected by a qualified mechanicwhenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes areentering into the passengercompartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involvingdamage to the exhaust system, un-derbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission controldevice installed in the exhaust system. Exhaustgases in the three-way catalyst are burned athigh temperatures to help reduce pollutants.

WARNING

● The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-tem are very hot. Keep people, animalsor flammable materials away from theexhaust system components.

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTINGAND DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving


CAUTION

● Do not use leaded gasoline. Depositsfrom leaded gasoline will seriously re-duce the three-way catalyst’s ability tohelp reduce exhaust pollutants.

● Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-tions in the ignition, fuel injection, orelectrical systems can cause overrichfuel flow into the three-way catalyst,causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-able loss of performance or other un-usual operating conditions aredetected. Have the vehicle inspectedpromptly by a NISSAN dealer.

● Avoid driving with an extremely low fuellevel. Running out of fuel could causethe engine to misfire, damaging thethree-way catalyst.

● Do not race the engine while warming itup.

● Do not push or tow your vehicle to startthe engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked monthly when cold and in-flated to the inflation pressure recommended bythe vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placardor tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size indicated onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tire inflationpressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has beenequipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltalewhen one or more of your tires is significantlyunderinflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-cantly underinflated tire causes the tire to over-heat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle’s handling and stoppingability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute forproper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’sresponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,

even if underinflation has not reached the level totrigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressuretelltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-function indicator is combined with the low tirepressure telltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-mately one minute and then remain continuouslyilluminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-function exists. When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not be able to detector signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alter-nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires andwheels allow the TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

Additional information:

● The TPMS does not monitor the tire pres-sure of the spare tire.

Starting and driving 5-3


● The TPMS will activate only when the vehicleis driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25km/h). Also, this system may not detect asudden drop in tire pressure (for example aflat tire while driving).

● Tire pressure rises and falls depending onthe heat caused by the vehicle’s operationand the outside temperature. Low outsidetemperature can lower the temperature ofthe air inside the tire which can cause alower tire inflation pressure. This may causethe low tire pressure warning light to illumi-nate. If the warning light illuminates in lowambient temperature, check the tire pres-sure for all four tires.

● You can also check the pressure of all tires(except the spare tire) on the display screen(if so equipped). The order of the tire pres-sure figures displayed on the screen doesnot correspond with the actual order of thetire position. See “Tire pressure information”in the “Display screen, heater, air conditionerand audio and phone systems” section.

For additional information, see “Low tire pressurewarning light” in the “Instruments and controls”section, “Tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible. (See “Flat tire” in the“In case of emergency” section forchanging a flat tire.)



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any metalparts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. Thismay cause poor reception of the signalsfrom the tire pressure sensors, and theTPMS will not function properly.

FCC Notice:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interface, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includinginterference that may cause undesired op-eration of the device.



AVOIDING COLLISION ANDROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safeand prudent manner may result in loss ofcontrol or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obeyall traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-neuvers, because these driving practices couldcause you to lose control of your vehicle. As withany vehicle, loss of control could result in acollision with other vehicles or objects, orcause the vehicle to roll over, particularly ifthe loss of control causes the vehicle toslide sideways. Be attentive at all times, andavoid driving when tired. Never drive when underthe influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-scription or over-the-counter drugs which maycause drowsiness). Always wear your seat beltas outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts andsupplemental restraint system” section of thismanual, and also instruct your passengers to doso.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in colli-sions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, anunbelted or improperly belted person issignificantly more likely to be injured orkilled than a person properly wearing aseat belt.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS ANDDRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alcoholor drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-duces coordination, delays reaction timeand impairs judgement. Driving afterdrinking alcohol increases the likelihoodof being involved in an accident injuringyourself and others. Additionally, if youare injured in an accident, alcohol canincrease the severity of the injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,you must choose not to drive under the influenceof alcohol. Every year thousands of people areinjured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-though the local laws vary on what is consideredto be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcoholaffects all people differently and most peopleunderestimate the effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! Andthat is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if yourability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.



WARNING

Never turn the ignition switch to the LOCKposition while driving. The steering wheelwill lock. This may cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle and could result inserious vehicle damage or personal injury.

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM

The ignition lock is designed so that the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK and removeduntil the selector lever is moved to the P (Park)position.

When turning the ignition switch, make sure theselector lever is in the P (Park) position.

If the selector lever is not returned to the P (Park)position, the ignition switch cannot be movedtoward LOCK.

When the ignition switch cannot be turned to-ward the LOCK position while keeping the Intel-ligent Key, proceed as follows:

1. Move the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

2. Turn the ignition switch slightly in the ONdirection.

3. Turn the key toward the LOCK position.

The selector lever can be moved from the P(Park) position if the ignition switch is inthe ON position and the foot brake pedal isdepressed.

There is an OFF position in between LOCK andACC, although it does not show on the lockcylinder. When the ignition is in OFF the steeringwheel is not locked.

In order for the steering wheel to be locked, itmust be turned about 1/6 of a turn counterclock-wise from the straight up position.

To lock the steering wheel, turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK position. To unlock thesteering wheel, push the ignition switch inand turn it gently while rotating the steer-ing wheel slightly right and left.

If the battery of the vehicle equipped withthe Intelligent Key system is discharged,the ignition switch cannot be turned fromthe LOCK position, even using the me-chanical key.

LSD0171

IGNITION SWITCH



IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS

Push in the ignition switch to the sB positionwhen you turn it.

LOCK (Normal parking position) sA :

The ignition switch can only be locked in theLOCK position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it ispushed in, and turned to the ACC position sCwhile carrying the Intelligent Key.

ACC (Accessories) sC :

This position activates electrical accessoriessuch as the radio, when the engine is not running.

ON (Normal operating position) sD :

This position turns on the ignition system and theelectrical accessories.

START sE :

This position starts the engine. As soon as theengine has started, release the knob immediately.It will automatically return to the ON position.

The ignition switch cannot be turned back to theLOCK position unless the selector lever is in P(Park) position. (It can be turned only to the sBposition.)

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the ignitionswitch in ACC or ON positions when theengine is not running for an extended pe-riod. This can discharge the battery.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZERSYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will notallow the engine to start without the use of theregistered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered key(for example, when interference is caused byanother registered key, an automated toll roaddevice or automatic payment device on the keyring), restart the engine using the following pro-cedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON positionfor approximately 5 seconds.

2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCKposition, and wait approximately 10 sec-onds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the device(which may have caused the interference)separate from the registered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-rate key ring to avoid interference from otherdevices.



● Make sure the area around the vehicle isclear.

● Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-ant, brake fluid, and window washer fluid asfrequently as possible, or at least wheneveryou refuel.

● Check that all windows and lights are clean.

● Visually inspect tires for their appearanceand condition. Also check tires for properinflation.

● Lock all doors.

● Position seat and adjust head restraints.

● Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

● Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers todo likewise.

● Check the operation of warning lights whenthe ignition switch is turned to the ON (3)position. See “Warning/indicator lights andaudible reminders” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section of this manual.

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to operate ifthe shift selector lever is in any of thedriving positions.

3. Crank the engine with your foot off theaccelerator pedal by turning the ignitionswitch to START. Release the switch whenthe engine starts. If the engine starts, butfails to run, repeat the above procedure.

● If the engine is very hard to start in ex-tremely cold weather or when restarting,depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-proximately 1/3 to the floor) and hold itand then crank the engine. Release thekey and the accelerator pedal when theengine starts.

● If the engine is very hard to start becauseit is flooded, depress the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and hold it.Crank the engine for 5-6 seconds. Aftercranking the engine, release the accel-erator pedal. Crank the engine with yourfoot off the accelerator pedal by turn-ing the ignition key to START. Release thekey when the engine starts. If the engine

starts, but fails to run, repeat the aboveprocedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more than15 seconds at a time. If the engine doesnot start, turn the key off and wait 10seconds before cranking again, otherwisethe starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up

Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-onds after starting. Do not race the enginewhile warming it up. Drive at moderatespeed for a short distance first, especially incold weather.

In cold weather, keep the engine running fora minimum of 2–3 minutes before shutting itoff. Starting and stopping the engine over ashort period of time may make the vehiclemore difficult to start.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE



CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

● Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or manualshift mode. Always depress the brakepedal until shifting is completed. Fail-ure to do so could cause you to losecontrol and have an accident.

● Cold engine idle speed is high, so usecaution when shifting into a forward orreverse gear before the engine haswarmed up.

● Do not downshift abruptly on slipperyroads. This may cause a loss of control.

● Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)while the vehicle is moving. This couldcause an accident.

CAUTION

When stopping the vehicle on an uphillgrade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brakeshould be used for this purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-trolled to produce maximum power and smoothoperation.

The recommended operating procedures for thistransmission are shown on the following pages.Follow these procedures for maximum vehicleperformance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-duced to protect the CVT if the enginespeed increases quickly when driving onslippery roads or while being tested onsome dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle1. After starting the engine, fully depress the

foot brake pedal before attempting to movethe shift selector lever out of the P (Park)position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed andmove the shift selector lever into a drivinggear.

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually startthe vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before attempt-ing to shift the selector lever to the P (Park)position.

The CVT is designed so the foot brakepedal MUST be depressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) to any drive position whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

The shift selector lever cannot be movedout of P (Park) and into any of the othergear positions if the ignition switch isturned to the LOCK, OFF or ACC position.

DRIVING THE VEHICLE



ShiftingAfter starting the engine, fully depress the brakepedal and move the shift selector lever from P(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the selectorlever is in any position while the engine isnot running. Failure to do so could causethe vehicle to move unexpectedly or rollaway and result in serious personal injuryor property damage.

If the ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC forany reason while the vehicle is in R (Reverse), N

(Neutral), or any drive position, the key cannot beturned to LOCK and be removed from the ignitionswitch. Additionally, the selector lever cannot bemoved to R (Reverse) from N (Neutral) or anydrive position for about 3 minutes after the igni-tion switch is turned to the ACC or OFF position.The selector lever can be moved from R (Re-verse) to P (Park) with the key in the OFF or ACCposition. If this occurs, perform the followingsteps:

1. Apply the parking brake when the vehicle isstopped.

2. Turn the key to the ON position.

3. Depress the foot brake pedal.

4. Move the shift selector lever to P (Park) or N(Neutral) to restart the vehicle (P is pre-ferred). Move the shift selector lever to P(Park) to park the vehicle and turn the igni-tion key to the LOCK position to remove thekey.

P (Park):

Use this selector position when the vehicle isparked or when starting the engine. Make surethe vehicle is completely stopped. The brakepedal must be depressed to move the se-lector lever from N (Neutral) or any driveposition to P (Park). Apply the parking brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brakefirst, then shift the selector lever into the P (Park)position.

R (Reverse):

CAUTION

Use this position only when the vehicle iscompletely stopped.

Use this position to back up. Make sure thevehicle is completely stopped before selectingthe R (Reverse) position. The brake pedalmust be depressed to move the selectorlever from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any driveposition to R (Reverse).

N (Neutral):

Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. Theengine can be started in this position. You mayshift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled enginewhile the vehicle is moving.

D (Drive):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

WSD0167



Manual shift mode

When the selector lever is shifted from D to themanual shift gate with the vehicle stopped orwhile driving, the transmission enters the manualshift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-ally.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is dis-played on the position indicator in the meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:

M1←→ M2 ←→ M3 ←→ M4 ←→ M5 ←→ M6

M6 (6th):

Use this position for all normal forward driving.

M5 (5th):

For driving up or down long slopes where enginebraking would be advantageous.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhillgrades.

M1 (1st):

Use this position when climbing steep hills slowlyor driving slowly through deep snow, sand ormud, or for maximum engine braking on steepdownhill grades.

● Remember not to drive at high speeds forextended periods of time in lower than M6range. This reduces fuel economy.

When shifting up:

Move the selector lever to the + (up) side. (Shiftsto higher range.)

When shifting down:

Move the selector lever to the 2 (down) side.(Shifts to lower range.)

● Moving the selector lever to the same sidetwice will shift the ranges in succession.However, if this motion is rapidly done, thesecond shifting may not be completed prop-erly.

When canceling the manual shift mode:

Return the selector lever to the D (Drive) positionto return the transmission to the normal drivingmode.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may not shift to the selected gear.This helps maintain driving perfor-mance and reduces the chance of ve-hicle damage or loss of control.

● In the manual shift mode, the transmis-sion may shift up automatically to ahigher range than selected if the enginespeed is too high. When the vehiclespeed decreases, the transmission auto-matically shifts down. The transmissionshifts to M1 (1st) gear before the vehiclecomes to a complete stop. When accel-erating again, it is necessary to shift upto the desired range.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is ex-tremely low, the manual shift mode may notwork and automatically shift as a drive mode.This is not a malfunction. In this case, returnthe selector lever to D (Drive) and drive for awhile and then shift to the manual shift mode.

● When the CVT fluid temperature is high, theshift range may upshift in lower rpm thanusual. This is not a malfunction.

WSD0167



Shift lock release

If the battery is discharged, the shift selector levermay not be moved from the P (Park) position evenwith the brake pedal depressed.

To move the shift selector lever, release the shiftlock. The shift selector lever can be moved to N(Neutral). However, the steering wheel will belocked unless the ignition switch is turned to theON position. This allows the vehicle to be movedif the battery is discharged.

To push the shift lock release, complete the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove the key


3. Remove the shift lock release cover asshown.

4. Insert a small screwdriver in the shift lockrelease slot and push down.

5. Move the shift selector lever to the N (Neu-tral) position while holding down the shiftlock release.

6. Turn the key to the ON position to unlock thesteering wheel. Now the vehicle may bemoved to the desired location.

If the shift selector lever cannot be moved out ofP (Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the CVTas soon as possible.

WARNING

If the selector lever cannot be moved fromthe P (Park) position while the engine isrunning and the brake pedal is depressed,the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-ing stop lights could cause an accidentinjuring yourself and others.

Accelerator downshift— in D (Drive) position and manualshift mode —For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-sion down into a lower gear, depending on thevehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protectionmodeThis transmission has a high fluid temperatureprotection mode. If the fluid temperature be-comes too high (for example, when climbingsteep grades in high temperature with heavyloads, such as when towing a trailer), enginepower and, under some conditions, vehiclespeed will be decreased automatically to reducethe chance of transmission damage. Vehiclespeed can be controlled with the acceleratorpedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may belimited.

WSD0168



Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-ditions, such as excessive wheel spinningand subsequent hard braking, the fail-safesystem may be activated. The MIL maycome on to indicate the fail-safe mode isactivated, see “Malfunction indicator lamp(MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls”sec-tion. This will occur even if all electricalcircuits are functioning properly. In thiscase, turn the ignition switch to the OFFposition and wait for 10 seconds. Then turnthe switch back to the ON position. Thevehicle should return to its normal operat-ing condition. If it does not return to itsnormal operating condition, have aNISSAN dealer check the transmission andrepair if necessary.

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature protec-tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.The reduced speed may be lower thanother traffic, which could increase thechance of a collision. Be especially care-ful when driving. If necessary, pull to theside of the road at a safe place and allowthe transmission to return to normal op-eration, or have it repaired if necessary.

WARNING

● Be sure the parking brake is fully re-leased before driving. Failure to do socan cause brake failure and lead to anaccident.

● Do not release the parking brake fromoutside the vehicle.

● Do not use the gear shift in place of theparking brake. When parking, be surethe parking brake is fully engaged.

● Do not leave children unattended in avehicle. They could release the parkingbrake and cause an accident.

PARKING BRAKE



To engage: Pull the lever up sA .

To release:

1. Firmly apply the foot brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. While pulling up on the parking brake leverslightly, push the button and lower com-pletely sB .

4. Before driving, be sure the brake warninglight goes out.

1. ACCEL/RES switch2. COAST/SET switch3. CANCEL switch4. ON·OFF switch

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISECONTROL

● If the cruise control system malfunctions, itcancels automatically. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel then blinks towarn the driver.

● If the SET indicator light blinks, turn thecruise control switch off and have the sys-tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.

● The SET indicator light may blink when thecruise control switch is turned ON whilepushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, orCANCEL switch. To properly set the cruisecontrol system, use the following proce-dures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when drivingunder the following conditions:

● When it is not possible to keep thevehicle at a set speed.

● In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies inspeed.

● On winding or hilly roads.

● On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

● In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehiclecontrol and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONSThe cruise control allows driving at a speed be-tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) withoutkeeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the mainswitch. The CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment panel comes on.

WSD0169 LSD0159

CRUISE CONTROL



To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle tothe desired speed, push the COAST/SET switchand release it. The SET indicator light in theinstrument panel comes on. Take your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the setspeed.

● To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-celerator pedal. When you release thepedal, the vehicle returns to the previouslyset speed.

● The vehicle may not maintain the set speedwhen going up or down steep hills. If thishappens, drive without the cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of thefollowing three methods.

● Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicatorlight in the instrument panel goes out.

● Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator lightgoes out.

● Turn the main switch off. Both the CRUISEindicator light and SET indicator light in theinstrument panel go out.

The cruise control is automatically canceled andthe SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:

● you depress the brake pedal while pushingthe ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST switch.The preset speed is deleted from memory.

● the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH(13 km/h) below the set speed.

● you move the shift selector lever to N (Neu-tral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Depress the accelerator pedal. When thevehicle attains the desired speed, push andrelease the COAST/SET switch.

● Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.When the vehicle attains the speed you de-sire, release the switch.

● Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.Each time you do this, the set speed in-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use oneof the following three methods.

● Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-hicle attains the desired speed, push theCOAST/SET switch and release it.

● Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-lease the switch when the vehicle slows tothe desired speed.

● Push and release the COAST/SET switch.Each time you do this, the set speed de-creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and re-lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-turns to the last set cruising speed when thevehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).



CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),follow these recommendations to obtainmaximum engine performance and en-sure the future reliability and economy ofyour new vehicle. Failure to follow theserecommendations may result in short-ened engine life and reduced engineperformance.

● Avoid driving for long periods at constantspeed, either fast or slow, and do not run theengine over 4,000 rpm.

● Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.

● Avoid quick starts.

● Avoid hard braking as much as possible.

● Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles(800 km). Your engine, axle or other partscould be damaged.

● Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintaincruising speeds with a constant acceleratorposition.

● Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.

● Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-hicles.

● Use a proper gear range which suits roadconditions. On level roads, shift into highgear as soon as possible.

● Avoid unnecessary engine idling.

● Keep your engine tuned up.

● Follow the recommended periodic mainte-nance schedule.

● Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wearand lowers fuel economy.

● Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-proper alignment increases tire wear andlowers fuel economy.

● Air conditioner operation lowers fueleconomy. Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

● When cruising at highway speeds, it is moreeconomical to use the air conditioner andleave the windows closed to reduce drag.

● Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.See “Engine oil and oil filter recommenda-tion” in “Technical and consumer informa-tion” later in this manual.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY



WARNING

● Do not stop or park the vehicle overflammable materials such as dry grass,waste paper or rags. They may igniteand cause a fire.

● Safe parking procedures require thatboth the parking brake be set and thetransmission placed into P (Park). Fail-ure to do so could cause the vehicle tomove unexpectedly or roll away and re-sult in an accident. Make sure the shiftlever has been pushed as far forward asit can go and cannot be moved withoutdepressing the foot brake pedal.

● Never leave the engine running whilethe vehicle is unattended.


1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift selector lever to the P (Park)position.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling intotraffic when parked on an incline, it is a goodpractice to turn the wheels as illustrated.

● HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: sA

Turn the wheels into the curb and move thevehicle forward until the curb side wheelgently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: sB

Turn the wheels away from the curb andmove the vehicle back until the curb sidewheel gently touches the curb.

● HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NOCURB: sC

Turn the wheels toward the side of the roadso the vehicle will move away from the cen-ter of the road if it moves.

4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-tion and remove the key.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS



The power assisted steering uses a hydraulicpump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.

If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, youwill still have control of the vehicle. However,much greater steering effort is needed, especiallyin sharp turns and at low speeds.

WARNING

If the engine is not running or is turned offwhile driving, the power assist for thesteering will not work. Steering will beharder to operate.

The brake system has two separate hydrauliccircuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will stillhave braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using enginevacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop thevehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will berequired to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-tance will be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out thebrakes and pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent thebrakes from overheating, reduce speed anddownshift to a lower gear before going down aslope or long grade. Overheated brakes mayreduce braking performance and could result inloss of vehicle control.

WARNING

● While driving on a slippery surface, becareful when braking, accelerating ordownshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-erating could cause the wheels to skidand result in an accident.

● If the engine is not running or is turnedoff while driving, the power assist forthe brakes will not work. Braking will beharder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven throughwater, the brakes may get wet. As a result, yourbraking distance will be longer and the vehiclemay pull to one side during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safespeed while lightly pressing the brake pedal toheat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes returnto normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at highspeeds until the brakes function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever thestopping effect of the parking brake is weakenedor whenever the parking brake shoes and/ordrum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure thebest brake performance.

POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM



This procedure is described in the vehicle servicemanual and can be performed by a NISSANdealer.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM(ABS)

The anti-lock braking system controls the brakesso the wheels do not lock when braking abruptlyor when braking on slippery surfaces. The systemdetects the rotation speed at each wheel andvaries the brake fluid pressure to prevent eachwheel from locking and sliding. By preventingwheel lockup, the system helps the driver main-tain steering control and helps to minimize swerv-ing and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing somay result in increased stoppingdistances.

Normal operation

The anti-lock braking system does not operate atspeeds below 3 - 6 MPH (5 - 10 km/h). (Thespeeds vary according to road conditions.)

When driving, the anti-lock braking system con-trols the wheels so they will not lock when brak-ing abruptly or when braking on a slippery road.Thus, steering control is increased and swervingof the vehicle is decreased during emergencybraking. The system detects the wheel rotationrate and electronically controls the pressure ap-plied to each brake. Slight vibration on the brakepedal accompanied by noise usually occurs whilethe ABS system is operating. Such vibration andnoise encountered during abrupt braking is not aproblem, but indicates that the system is func-tioning properly. However, the pulsation may in-dicate that road conditions are hazardous andextra care is required while driving.

Self-test featureThe anti-lock braking system consists of elec-tronic sensors and hydraulic solenoids controlledby a computer. The computer has a built-in diag-nostic feature that tests the system each time youstart the engine and move the vehicle at a lowspeed in forward or reverse. When the self-testoccurs, you may hear a “clunk”noise and/or feel apulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and isnot an indication of any malfunction. If the com-puter senses any malfunction, it switches theanti-lock braking system off and turns on the ABSbrake warning light on the instrument panel. Thebraking system then operates normally, but with-out anti-lock assistance.

If the light comes on during the self-test or whiledriving, take the vehicle to a NISSAN dealer forrepair.

WARNING

● The anti-lock braking system is a so-phisticated device, but it cannot pre-vent accidents resulting from carelessor dangerous driving techniques. It canhelp maintain vehicle control duringbraking on slippery surfaces, but re-member that the stopping distance onslippery surfaces will be longer than onnormal surfaces even with the anti-lockbraking system. Stopping distancesmay also be longer on rough, gravel orsnow covered roads, or if you are usingtire chains. Tire type and condition mayalso affect braking effectiveness. Al-ways maintain a safe distance from thevehicle in front of you. Ultimately, theresponsibility for safety of self and oth-ers rests in the hands of the driver.

● Tire type and condition of tires may alsoaffect braking effectiveness.

● When replacing tires, install the speci-fied size of tires on all four wheels.



● When installing a spare tire, make sureit is the proper size and type as speci-fied on the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label. For tire placard location in-formation, refer to “Tire and LoadingInformation label” in the “Technical andconsumer information” section of thismanual.

● Refer to “Wheels and tires” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sec-tion of this manual.

When accelerating on slippery surfaces the tiremay spin or slip. With the vehicle traction controlsystem (TCS), sensors detect these movementsand control the braking and engine output to helpimprove vehicle stability while accelerating.

● When the traction control system is operat-ing, the slip indicator in the instrument panelblinks.

● If the slip indicator blinks, the vehicle is un-der slippery conditions. Be sure to drivecarefully. See “Slip indicator light”and “Trac-tion control system (TCS) off indicator light”in the “Instruments and controls” section ofthis manual.

● If a malfunction occurs in the system,the and indicator lightscome on in the instrument panel.

As long as these lights are on, the traction controlfunction is canceled. The vehicle will behave likea vehicle without the system.

WARNING

● The traction control system is designedto help improve driving stability butdoes not prevent accidents due toabrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the traction control systemmay not operate properly and theindicator light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs and bushingsare not standard equipment or are ex-tremely deteriorated, the traction con-trol system may not operate properlyand the indicator light may comeon.

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS)(if so equipped)



● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the traction control system may not op-erate properly and the indicatorlight may come on. Do not drive onthese types of roads.

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the tractioncontrol system may not operate prop-erly and the indicator light maycome on.

● The traction control system is not a sub-stitute for winter tires or tire chains on asnow covered road.

When accelerating or driving on slippery sur-faces, the tires may spin or slide. With the VehicleDynamic Control (VDC) system, sensors detectthese movements and control the braking andengine output to help improve vehicle stability.

● When the vehicle dynamic control (VDC)system is operating, the slip indicator in theinstrument panel blinks.

● If the slip indicator blinks, the road condi-tions are slippery. Be sure to adjust yourspeed and driving to these conditions. See“Slip indicator light”, and “Vehicle dynamiccontrol (VDC) off indicator light” in the “In-struments and controls” section.

● Indicator lightIf malfunction occurs in the system,the and indicator lights comeon in the instrument panel.As long as these indicator lights are on, thetraction control function is canceled.

If the vehicle is operated with the vehicle dynamiccontrol system OFF using the VDC OFF switch,VDC functions will be turned off. The VDC sys-tem will still try to transfer power from a slippingdrive wheel to one with more traction when theVDC system switch is OFF. The Slip indicator willflash if wheel spin is detected. The ABS will stilloperate with the VDC system off.

When the VDC system is operating, you may feela pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise orvibration from under the hood. This is normal andindicates that the VDC system is working prop-erly.

The computer has a built in diagnostic featurethat tests the system each time you start theengine and move the vehicle forward or in reverseat a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, youmay hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation inthe brake pedal. This is normal and is not anindication of a malfunction.

WARNING

● The vehicle dynamic control system isdesigned to help improve driving stabil-ity but does not prevent accidents dueto abrupt steering operation at highspeeds or by careless or dangerousdriving techniques. Reduce vehiclespeed and be especially careful whendriving and cornering on slippery sur-faces and always drive carefully.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)SYSTEM (if so equipped)



● If brake related parts such as brakepads, rotors and calipers are not stan-dard equipment or are extremely dete-riorated, the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly andthe vehicle dynamic control off indica-tor light may come on.

● Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.If suspension parts such as shock ab-sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer barsand bushings are not NISSAN approvedfor your vehicle or are extremely dete-riorated the vehicle dynamic controlsystem may not operate properly. Thiscould adversely affect vehicle handlingperformance, and the VDC OFF indica-tor light may come on.

● When driving on extremely inclined sur-faces such as higher banked corners,the vehicle dynamic control system maynot operate properly and the VDC OFFindicator light may come on. Do notdrive on these types of roads.

● When driving on an unstable surfacesuch as a turntable, ferry, elevator orramp, the vehicle dynamic control offindicator light may illuminate. This isnot a malfunction. Restart the engineafter driving onto a stable surface

● If wheels or tires other than the recom-mended ones are used, the vehicle dy-namic control system may not operateproperly and the vehicle dynamic con-trol off indicator light may come on.

● The vehicle dynamic control system isnot a substitute for winter tires or tirechains on a snow covered road.

WARNING

● Always turn and look back before back-ing. The RSS is not a substitute forproper backing procedures.

● Read and understand the limitations ofthe rear sonar system as contained inthis section. Inclement weather may af-fect the function of the RSS; this mayinclude reduced performance or a falseactivation.

● This system is not designed to preventcontact with small or moving objects.

WSD0170

REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if soequipped)



● The system is designed as an aid to thedriver in detecting large stationary ob-jects to help avoid damaging the ve-hicle. The system will not detect smallobjects below the bumper, and may notdetect objects close to the bumper oron the ground.

● If your vehicle sustains damage to therear bumper fascia, leaving it mis-aligned or bent, the sensing zone maybe altered causing inaccurate measure-ment of obstacles or false alarms.

The Rear Sonar System (RSS) sounds a tone towarn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumperwhen the shift selector is in R (Reverse). Thesystem may not detect objects at speeds above 3mph (5 km/h) and may not detect certain angularor moving objects.

The RSS detects obstacles up to 6 feet (1.8 m)from the rear bumper with a decreased coveragearea at the outer corners of the bumper, (refer tothe illustration for approximate zone coverageareas). As you move closer to the obstacle, therate of the tone increases. When the obstacle isless than 10 inches (25.0 cm) away, the tone willsound continuously. If the RSS detects a station-ary or receding object further than 10 inches(25.0 cm) from the side of the vehicle, the tone

will sound for only three seconds. Once the sys-tem detects an object approaching, the tone willsound again.

The RSS automatically turns on when the shiftselector lever is placed in R (Reverse) and theignition is ON. The RSS OFF switch on theinstrument panel allows the driver to turn the RSSon and off. To turn the RSS off, the ignition mustbe ON, and the shift selector lever in R (Reverse).An indicator light on the switch will illuminatewhen the system is turned off. If the indicator lightilluminates when the RSS is not turned off, it mayindicate a failure in the RSS.

Keep the RSS sensors (located on the rearbumper fascia) free from snow, ice and largeaccumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensorswith sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, itwill affect the accuracy of the RSS.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCKTo prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomesfrozen, heat the key before inserting it into the keyhole or use the remote keyless entry keyfob (if soequipped).

ANTI-FREEZEIn the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check theanti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

BATTERYIf the battery is not fully charged during extremelycold weather conditions, the battery fluid mayfreeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-mum efficiency, the battery should be checkedregularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-tenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING



DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, including theengine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed toprovide superior performance on dry pave-ment. However, the performance of thesetires will be substantially reduced in snowyand icy conditions. If you operate your ve-hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALLSEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Pleaseconsult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,size, speed rating and availability informa-tion.

2. For additional traction on icy roads, studdedtires may be used. However, some U.S.states and Canadian provinces prohibit theiruse. Check local, state and provincial lawsbefore installing studded tires.

Skid and traction capabilities of studdedsnow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For details, see“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items becarried in the vehicle during winter:

● A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to removeice and snow from the windows and wiperblades.

● A sturdy, flat board to be placed under thejack to give it firm support.

● A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.

● Extra window washer fluid to refill the reser-voir tank.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

● Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),very cold snow or ice can be slick andvery hard to drive on. The vehicle willhave much less traction or “grip” underthese conditions. Try to avoid driving onwet ice until the road is salted orsanded.

● Whatever the condition, drive with cau-tion. Accelerate and slow down withcare. If accelerating or downshifting toofast, the drive wheels will lose evenmore traction.

● Allow more stopping distance underthese conditions. Braking should bestarted sooner than on dry pavement.

● Allow greater following distances onslippery roads.

● Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).These may appear on an otherwiseclear road in shaded areas. If a patch ofice is seen ahead, brake before reach-ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,and avoid any sudden steeringmaneuvers.

● Do not use the cruise control on slip-pery roads.

● Snow can trap dangerous exhaustgases under your vehicle. Keep snowclear of the exhaust pipe and fromaround your vehicle.



ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if soequipped)An engine block heater to assist in extreme coldtemperature starting is available through aNISSAN dealer.

WARNING

Do not use your heater with an un-grounded electrical system or two-pronged (cheater) adapters. You can beinjured by an electrical shock if you use anungrounded connection.




MEMO

6 In case of emergency

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Tire pressure monitoring system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7Push starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10

Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) . . . . . . . . . 6-12


TIRE PRESSURE MONITORINGSYSTEM

This vehicle is equipped with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-sure of all tires except the spare. When the lowtire pressure warning light is lit, one or more ofyour tires is significantly underinflated. Ifequipped, the system also displays pressure ofall tires (except the spare tire) on the displayscreen by sending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel. If the vehicle is beingdriven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressurewarning light. This system will activate only whenthe vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). For more details, refer to“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”in the “Instruments and controls” section, “Tirepressure information” in the “Display screen,heater, air conditioner and audio and phone sys-tems” section and “Tire pressure monitoring sys-tem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section.

WARNING

● If the low tire pressure warning lightilluminates while driving, avoid suddensteering maneuvers or abrupt braking,reduce vehicle speed, pull off the roadto a safe location and stop the vehicleas soon as possible. Serious vehicledamage could occur and may lead to anaccident and could result in seriouspersonal injury. Check the tire pressurefor all four tires. Adjust the tire pressureto the recommended COLD tire pres-sure shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label to turn the low tirepressure warning light OFF. If you havea flat tire, replace it with a spare tire assoon as possible.



● Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosoltire sealant into the tires, as this maycause a malfunction of the tire pressuresensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-low.

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road andaway from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the parkingbrake. Move the shift selector lever to P(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and tosignal professional road assistance person-nel that you need assistance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicleand stand in a safe place, away from trafficand clear of the vehicle.

FLAT TIRE

6-2 In case of emergency


WARNING

● Make sure the parking brake is securelyapplied and the CVT is shifted into P(Park).

● Never change tires when the vehicle ison a slope, ice or slippery areas. This ishazardous.

● Never change tires if oncoming traffic isclose to your vehicle. Wait for profes-sional road assistance.

Blocking wheelsPlace suitable blocks s1 at both the front andback of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tires2 to prevent the vehicle from moving when it isjacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehiclemay move and result in personal injury.

Getting the spare tire and toolsOpen the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting andspare tire cover. Remove the jack s1 and wheelnut wrench s2 from the tool box. Remove thespare tire.

WCE0044 LCE0074

In case of emergency 6-3


Jacking up vehicle and removing thedamaged tire

WARNING

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by the jack. If it is nec-essary to work under the vehicle, sup-port it with safety stands.

● Use only the jack provided with yourvehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use thejack provided with your vehicle on othervehicles. The jack is designed for liftingonly your vehicle during a tire change.

Type ALCE0075

Type BLCE0076 CE1089



● Use the correct jack-up points. Neveruse any other part of the vehicle for jacksupport.

● Never jack up the vehicle more thannecessary.

● Never use blocks on or under the jack.

● Do not start or run the engine whilevehicle is on the jack. It may cause thevehicle to move. This is especially truefor vehicles with limited slipdifferentials.

● Do not allow passengers to stay in thevehicle while it is on the jack.

● Never run the engine with a wheel(s) offthe ground. It may cause the vehicle tomove.

Always refer to the proper illustrations for thecorrect placement and jack-up points for yourspecific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached tothe jack body and the following instruc-tions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns byturning counterclockwise with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nutsuntil the tire is off the ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the jack-uppoint as illustrated so the top of the jackcontacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.Align the jack head between the twonotches in the front or the rear as shown.Also fit the groove of the jack head betweenthe notches as shown.

The jack should be used on firm andlevel ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack leverand rod with both hands. Carefully raise thevehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-move the wheel nuts, and then remove thetire.

LCE0020



Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergencyuse. See specific instructions under theheading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section of thismanual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-tween the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tightenthe wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheelnuts alternately and evenly as illustrated untilthey are tight.

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tiretouches the ground. Then, with the wheelnut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securelyin the sequence illustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ,sE ). Lower the vehicle completely.

WARNING

● Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause thewheel to become loose or come off.This could cause an accident.

● Do not use oil or grease on the wheelstuds or nuts. This could cause the nutsto become loose.

● Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-hicle has been driven for 600 miles(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nutsto the specified torque with a torquewrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened tospecification at all times. It is recom-mended that wheel nuts be tightened tospecifications at each lubrication interval.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has beenparked for three hours or more or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tireand Loading Information label affixed tothe driver side center pillar.

After adjusting tire pressure to the COLDtire pressure, the display (if so equipped) ofthe tire pressure information may showhigher pressure than the COLD tire pres-sure after the vehicle has been driven morethan 1 mile (1.6 km). This is because the tirepressurizes as the tire temperature rises.This does not indicate a system malfunc-tion.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-ment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floorcarpeting over the damaged tire.

7. Close the trunk.

WCE0056



WARNING

● Always make sure that the spare tireand jacking equipment are properly se-cured after use. Such items can becomedangerous projectiles in an accident orsudden stop.

● The spare tire is designed for emer-gency use. See specific instructions un-der the heading “Wheels and tires” inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”section of this manual.

To start your engine with a booster battery, theinstructions and precautions below must be fol-lowed.

WARNING

● If done incorrectly, jump starting canlead to a battery explosion, resulting insevere injury or death. It could alsodamage your vehicle.

● Explosive hydrogen gas is alwayspresent in the vicinity of the battery.Keep all sparks and flames away fromthe battery.

● Do not allow battery fluid to come intocontact with eyes, skin, clothing orpainted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-rosive sulfuric acid solution which cancause severe burns. If the fluid shouldcome into contact with anything, imme-diately flush the contacted area withwater.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

● The booster battery must be rated at 12volts. Use of an improperly rated batterycan damage your vehicle.

● Whenever working on or near a battery,always wear suitable eye protectors (forexample, goggles or industrial safetyspectacles) and remove rings, metalbands, or any other jewelry. Do not leanover the battery when jump starting.

● Do not attempt to jump start a frozenbattery. It could explode and cause se-rious injury.

● Your vehicle has an automatic enginecooling fan. It could come on at anytime. Keep hands and other objectsaway from it.

JUMP STARTING



WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.Failure to do so could result in damage tothe charging system and cause personalinjury.

1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,position the two vehicles to bring their bat-teries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-lector lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnec-essary electrical systems (lights, heater, airconditioner, etc.).

3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if soequipped). Cover the battery with an oldcloth to reduce explosion hazard.

4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-lustrated (sA , sB , sC , sD ).

CAUTION

● Always connect positive (1) to positive(1) and negative (2) to body ground (forexample, strut mounting bolt, enginelift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.

● Make sure the jumper cables do nottouch moving parts in the engine com-partment and that the cable clamps donot contact any other metal.

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle andlet it run for a few minutes.

6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-gine of the vehicle being jump started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged formore than 10 seconds. If the engine doesnot start right away, turn the key off andwait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-nect the negative cable and then the positivecable.

8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Besure to dispose of the cloth used to coverthe vent holes as it may be contaminatedwith corrosive acid.

WCE0054



Do not start the engine by pushing.

CAUTION

CVT models cannot be push-started ortow-started. Attempting to do so maycause transmission damage.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by anextremely high temperature gauge reading), or ifyou feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormalnoise, etc. take the following steps.

WARNING

● Do not continue to drive if your vehicleoverheats. Doing so could cause enginedamage or a vehicle fire.

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never remove the radiator cap while theengine is still hot. When the radiatorcap is removed, pressurized hot waterwill spurt out, possibly causing seriousinjury.

● Do not open the hood if steam is com-ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, applythe parking brake and move the shift lever toP (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all thewindows, move the heater or air conditionertemperature control to maximum hot and fancontrol to high speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen forsteam or coolant escaping from the radiatorbefore opening the hood. (If steam or cool-ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do notopen the hood further until no steam orcoolant can be seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the en-gine, stand clear to prevent gettingburned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage orlooseness. Also check if the cooling fan isrunning. The radiator hoses and radiatorshould not leak water. If coolant is leaking,the water pump belt is missing or loose, orthe cooling fan does not run, stop the en-gine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,jewelry or clothing to come into contactwith, or get caught in, engine belts or theengine cooling fan. The engine coolingfan can start at any time when the coolanttemperature is high.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS



6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tankwith the engine running. Add coolant to theengine coolant reservoir tank if necessary.Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSANdealer.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial inCanada) and local regulations for towing must befollowed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-tors are generally familiar with the applicable lawsand procedures for towing. To assure propertowing and to prevent accidental damage to yourvehicle, NISSAN recommends having a serviceoperator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to havethe service operator carefully read the followingprecautions:

WARNING

● Never ride in a vehicle that is beingtowed.

● Never get under your vehicle after it hasbeen lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

● When towing, make sure that the trans-mission, axles, steering system andpowertrain are in working condition. Ifany unit is damaged, dollies must beused.

● Always attach safety chains beforetowing.

For information about towing your vehicle behinda recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE



TOWING RECOMMENDED BYNISSANNISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towedwith the driving (front) wheels off the ground orplace the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

● Never tow CVT models with the frontwheels on the ground or four wheels onthe ground (forward or backward), asthis may cause serious and expensivedamage to the transmission. If it is nec-essary to tow the vehicle with the rearwheels raised always use towing dolliesunder the front wheels.

● When towing with the front wheels ontowing dollies:

– Turn the ignition switch to the OFFposition, and secure the steeringwheel in a straight-ahead positionwith a rope or similar device. Neversecure the steering wheel by turningthe ignition key to the LOCK position.This may damage the steering lockmechanism.

– Move the gearshift lever to the N(Neutral) position.

● When towing CVT models with the rearwheels on the ground (if you do not usetowing dollies): Always release theparking brake.

ACE0511 SCE0199A



VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuckvehicle)

Front or Rear

WARNING

● Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

● Do not spin your tires at high speed.This could cause them to explode andresult in serious injury. Parts of yourvehicle could also overheat and bedamaged.

CAUTION

● Tow chains or cables must be attachedonly to the main structural members ofthe vehicle or the towing hooks (if soequipped). Otherwise, the vehicle bodywill be damaged.

● Do not use the vehicle tie downs to freea vehicle stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.Never tow the vehicle using the vehicletie downs or recovery hooks.

● Always pull the cable straight out fromthe front or rear of the vehicle. Neverpull the vehicle at an angle.

● Pulling devices should be routed sothey do not touch any part of the sus-pension, steering, brake or coolingsystems.

● Pulling devices such as ropes or canvasstraps are not recommended for use invehicle towing or recovery.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control System(if so equipped).

2. Make sure the area in front and behind thevehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clearan area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-ward.

● Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)and D (Drive).

● Apply the accelerator as little as possibleto maintain the rocking motion.

● Release the accelerator pedal beforeshifting between R (Reverse) and D(Drive).

● Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55km/h).

5. If the vehicle can not be freed after a fewtries, contact a professional towing serviceto remove the vehicle.

WCE0133



7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Aluminum alloy wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Most common factors contributing to vehiclecorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6Environmental factors influence the rate ofcorrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6To protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6


In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, please wash yourvehicle as soon as you can:

● after a rainfall to prevent possible damagefrom acid rain.

● after driving on coastal roads.

● when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs geton the paint surface.

● when dust or mud builds up on the surface.

Whenever possible, store or park your vehicleinside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in ashady area or protect the vehicle with a bodycover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint surfacewhen putting on or removing the bodycover.

WASHINGWash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty ofwater. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mildsoap, a special vehicle soap or general purposedishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm(never hot) water.

CAUTION

● Do not wash the vehicle with stronghousehold soap, strong chemical deter-gents, gasoline or solvents.

● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-light or while the vehicle body is hot, asthe surface may become water-spotted.

● Avoid using tight-napped or roughcloths, such as washing mitts. Caremust be taken when removingcaked-on dirt or other foreign sub-stances so the paint surface is notscratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of cleanwater.

Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable tothe effects of road salt. Therefore, these areasmust be cleaned regularly. Take care that thedrain holes in the lower edge of the door areopen. Spray water under the body and in thewheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash awayroad salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle toavoid water spots.

WAXINGRegular waxing protects the paint surface andhelps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing isrecommended to remove built-up wax residueand to avoid a weathered appearance beforere-applying wax.

A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing theproper product.

● Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-ing. Follow the instructions supplied with thewax.

● Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,cutting compounds or cleaners that maydamage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive polishingon a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull thefinish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTSRemove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,and tree sap as quickly as possible from thesurface of the paint to avoid lasting damage orstaining. Special cleaning products are availableat a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessorystore.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care


UNDERBODYIn areas where road salt is used in winter, it isnecessary to clean the underbody regularly inorder to prevent dirt and salt from building up andcausing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-riod and again in the spring, the underseal mustbe checked and, if necessary, retreated.

GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be easierto clean if the high-mounted stop light is removedfirst.

Be careful when removing the high-mountedstop light to reduce the risk of damaging thehigh-mounted stop light wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

s1 Push toward rear of vehicle.

s2 Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be properlyreinstalled before driving your vehicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust filmfrom the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass tobecome coated with a film after the vehicle isparked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a softcloth will easily remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the windows,do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasivecleaners or chlorine-based disinfectantcleaners. They could damage the electri-cal conductors, radio antenna elements orrear window defroster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-ened in a mild soap solution, especially duringwinter months in areas where road salt is used. Ifnot removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoidstaining or discoloring the wheels:

● Do not use a cleaner that uses strongacid or alkali contents to clean thewheels.

LAI0008

Appearance and care 7-3


● Do not apply wheel cleaners to thewheels when they are hot. The wheeltemperature should be the same as am-bient temperature.

● Rinse the wheel to completely removethe cleaner within 15 minutes after thecleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTSClean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGSNISSAN does not recommend the use of tiredressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating tothe tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it mayreact with the coating and form a compound. Thiscompound may come off the tire while driving andstain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take thefollowing precautions:

● Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-ing on the tire dissolves more easily with anoil-based tire dressing.

● Apply a light coat of tire dressing to helpprevent it from entering the tiretread/grooves (where it would be difficult toremove).

● Wipe off excess tire dressing using a drytowel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.

● Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-mended by tire dressing manufacturer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the interiortrim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuumcleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl andleather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with adry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in order tomaintain the appearance of the leather.

Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-tectors contain chemicals that may stain orbleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to cleanthe meter and gauge lens.

CAUTION

● Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-lar material.

● Small dirt particles can be abrasive anddamaging to leather surfaces andshould be removed promptly. Do notuse saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-gents or ammonia-based cleaners asthey may damage the leather’s naturalfinish.

CLEANING INTERIOR



● Never use fabric protectors unless rec-ommended by the manufacturer.

● Do not use glass or plastic cleaner onmeter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-age the lens cover.

FLOOR MATSThe use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make iteasier to clean the interior. No matter whatmats are used, be sure they are fitted foryour vehicle and are properly positioned inthe footwell to prevent interference withpedal operation. Mats should be maintainedwith regular cleaning and replaced if they be-come excessively worn.

Floor mat positioning aid (driver’s sideonly)This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket toact as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floormats have been specially designed for your ve-hicle model. The driver’s side floor mat has agrommet hole incorporated in it. Position the matby placing the floor mat bracket hook through thefloor mat grommet hole while centering the mat inthe footwell.

Periodically check to make certain the mats areproperly positioned.

SEAT BELTSThe seat belts can be cleaned by wiping themwith a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.Allow the belts to dry completely in the shadebefore using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-tal restraint system” section of this manual.

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in theretractor. NEVER use bleach, dye orchemical solvents to clean the seat belts,since these materials may severelyweaken the seat belt webbing.WAI0006

Appearance and care 7-5


MOST COMMON FACTORSCONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLECORROSION

● The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirtand debris in body panel sections, cavities,and other areas.

● Damage to paint and other protective coat-ings caused by gravel and stone chips orminor traffic accidents.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORSINFLUENCE THE RATE OFCORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.Wet floor coverings will not dry completely insidethe vehicle, and should be removed for drying toavoid floor panel corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of highrelative humidity, especially those areas wherethe temperatures stay above freezing and whereatmospheric pollution exists and road salt isused.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the airin coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.

TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLEFROM CORROSION

● Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep thevehicle clean.

● Always check for minor damage to the paintand repair it as soon as possible.

● Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doorsopen to avoid water accumulation.

● Check the underbody for accumulation ofsand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with wateras soon as possible.

CAUTION

● NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-bris from the passenger compartmentby washing it out with a hose. Removedirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.

● Never allow water or other liquids tocome in contact with electronic compo-nents inside the vehicle as this maydamage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing areextremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosionand deterioration of underbody componentssuch as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,brake cables, floor pan and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be cleanedperiodically.

For additional protection against rust and corro-sion, which may be required in some areas, con-sult a NISSAN dealer.

CORROSION PROTECTION



8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself

Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Explanation of general maintenance items . . . . . . . . . 8-2Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7

Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8

Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . 8-11Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

Window washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Spark plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15

Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16

Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20Brake pad wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21Passenger compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24Intelligent key battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Exterior and interior lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27

Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Tire pressure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Tire labeling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-36Types of tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Tire chains. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40


Your new NISSAN has been designed to haveminimum maintenance requirements with longerservice intervals to save you both time andmoney. However, some day-to-day and regularmaintenance is essential to maintain your NIS-SAN’s good mechanical condition, as well as itsemission and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure thatthe scheduled maintenance, as well as generalmaintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one whocan ensure that your vehicle receives propermaintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-nance chain.

Scheduled maintenance

For your convenience, both required and optionalscheduled maintenance items are described andlisted in your “NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide.” You must refer to that guide to ensurethat necessary maintenance is performed on yourNISSAN at regular intervals.

General maintenance

General maintenance includes those items whichshould be checked during normal day-to-day op-eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-eration. It is your responsibility to perform thesemaintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks requiresminimal mechanical skill and only a few generalautomotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done by you,a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSANdealer.

Where to go for service

If maintenance service is required or your vehicleappears to malfunction, have the systemschecked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialistswho are kept up-to-date with the latest serviceinformation through technical bulletins, servicetips, and in-dealership training programs. Theyare completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-hicles before they work on your vehicle, ratherthan after they have worked on it.

You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’sservice department performs the best job to meetthe maintenance requirements on your vehicle —in a reliable and economical way.

During the normal day-to-day operation of thevehicle, general maintenance should be per-formed regularly as prescribed in this section. Ifyou detect any unusual sounds, vibrations orsmells, be sure to check for the cause or have aNISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, youshould notify a NISSAN dealer if you think thatrepairs are required.

When performing any checks or maintenancework, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-tions” later in this section.

EXPLANATION OF GENERALMAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the followingitems with “*” is found later in this section.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should beperformed from time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Doors and engine hood Check that the doorsand engine hood operate properly. Also ensurethat all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.Make sure that the secondary latch keeps thehood from opening when the primary latch isreleased.

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself


When driving in areas using road salt or othercorrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.

Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lights are alloperating properly and installed securely. Alsocheck headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts* When checking the tires,make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and checkfor any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km).

Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge oftenand always prior to long distance trips. If neces-sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including thespare, to the pressure specified. Check carefullyfor damage, cuts or excessive wear.

Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicleshould pull to either side while driving on astraight and level road, or if you detect uneven orabnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheelalignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates atnormal highway speeds, wheel balancing may beneeded.

● For additional information regarding tires,refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) inthe Warranty Information Booklet .

Windshield Clean the windshield on a regularbasis. Check the windshield at least every sixmonths for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-aged windshield repaired by a qualified repairfacility.

Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks orwear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should bechecked on a regular basis, such as when per-forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-hicle, etc.

Additional information on the followingitems with an “*” is found later in this sec-tion.

Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smoothoperation and make sure the pedal does not bindor require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat awayfrom the pedal.

Brake pedal* Check the pedal for smooth op-eration. If the brake pedal suddenly goes downfurther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or thevehicle seems to take longer to stop, see aNISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mataway from the pedal.

Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull thevehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairlysteep hill check that the vehicle is held securelywith the selector lever in the P (Park) positionwithout applying any brakes.

Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely heldon a fairly steep hill with only the parking brakeapplied. If the parking brake needs adjusted, seea NISSAN dealer.

Seats Check seat position controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. to ensure theyoperate smoothly and all latches lock securely inevery position. Check that the head restraintsmove up and down smoothly and the locks (if soequipped) hold securely in all latched positions.

Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat beltsystem (for example, buckles, anchors, adjustersand retractors) operate properly and smoothly,and are installed securely. Check the belt web-bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.

Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hardsteering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes Make sure allwarning lights and chimes are operating properly.

Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3


Windshield wiper and washer* Check thatthe wipers and washer operate properly and thatthe wipers do not streak.

Windshield defroster Check that the aircomes out of the defroster outlets properly and insufficient quantity when operating the heater orair conditioner.

Under the hood and vehicleThe maintenance items listed here should bechecked periodically (for example, each time youcheck the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. Itshould be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-hicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

Brake fluid levels* Make sure that the brakefluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines onthe reservoir.

Engine coolant level* Check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive beltsare not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level* Check the level after parkingthe vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drainback into the oil pan.

Exhaust system Make sure there are no loosesupports, cracks or holes. If the sound of theexhaust seems unusual or there is a smell ofexhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaustsystem inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See thecarbon monoxide warning in the “Starting anddriving” section of this manual.

Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. Water dripping from theair conditioner after use is normal. If you shouldnotice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,check for the cause and have it corrected imme-diately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines Checkthe level when the fluid is cold, with the engineoff. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses Check the front of theradiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure thehoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or looseconnections.

Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-posed to corrosive substances such as thoseused on icy roads or to control dust. It is veryimportant to remove these substances from theunderbody, otherwise rust may form on the floorpan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the

end of winter, the underbody should be thor-oughly flushed with plain water, in those areaswhere mud and dirt may have accumulated. Seethe “Appearance and care” section of thismanual.

Windshield washer fluid* Check that there isadequate fluid in the reservoir.



When performing any inspection or maintenancework on your vehicle, always take care to preventserious accidental injury to yourself or damage tothe vehicle. The following are general precau-tions which should be closely observed.

WARNING

● Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-ply the parking brake securely andblock the wheels to prevent the vehiclefrom moving. Move the shift selectorlever to P (Park).

● Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position when performing anyparts replacement or repairs.

● Never leave the engine or automatictransmission related component har-nesses disconnected while the ignitionswitch is in the ON position.

● Never connect or disconnect the batteryor any transistorized component whilethe ignition switch is in the ON position.

● Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-matic engine cooling fan. It may come onat any time without warning, even if theignition key is in the OFF position and theengine is not running. To avoid injury,always disconnect the negative batterycable before working near the fan.

● If you must work with the engine run-ning, keep your hands, clothing, hairand tools away from moving fans, beltsand any other moving parts.

● It is advisable to secure or remove anyloose clothing and remove any jewelry,such as rings, watches, etc. beforeworking on your vehicle.

● Always wear eye protection wheneveryou work on your vehicle.

● If you must run the engine in an en-closed space such as a garage, be surethere is proper ventilation for exhaustgases to escape.

● Never get under the vehicle while it issupported only by a jack. If it is neces-sary to work under the vehicle, supportit with safety stands.

● Keep smoking materials, flame andsparks away from the fuel tank andbattery.

● On gasoline engine models with themultiport fuel injection (MFI) system,the fuel filter or fuel lines should beserviced by a NISSAN dealer becausethe fuel lines are under high pressureeven when the engine is off.

CAUTION

● Do not work under the hood while theengine is hot. Turn the engine off andwait until it cools down.

● Avoid contact with used engine oil andcoolant. Improperly disposed engineoil, engine coolant and/or other vehiclefluids can damage the environment. Al-ways conform to local regulations fordisposal of vehicle fluid.

This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” sectiongives instructions regarding only those itemswhich are relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-der information” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or improperservicing may result in operating difficulties orexcessive emissions, and could affect warrantycoverage. If in doubt about any servicing,have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS



1. Power steering fluid reservoir2. Engine oil filler cap3. Brake fluid reservoir4. Air cleaner5. Battery6. Fuse/Fusible link box7. Engine oil dipstick8. Radiator cap9. Drive belt location10. Fuse block11. Windshield washer fluid reservoir12. Engine coolant reservoir

NOTE:

Engine cover removed for clarity.

WDI0525

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECKLOCATIONS



The engine cooling system is filled at the factorywith Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant protection. The anti-freezesolution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.Additional engine cooling system additives arenot necessary.

WARNING

● Never remove the radiator or coolantreservoir cap when the engine is hot.Wait until the engine and radiator cooldown. Serious burns could be causedby high pressure fluid escaping fromthe radiator. See precautions in “If yourvehicle overheats” found in the “In caseof emergency” section of this manual.

● The radiator is equipped with a pres-sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-gine damage, use only a genuineNISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

When adding or replacing coolant, be sureto use only a Genuine NISSAN Long LifeAntifreeze/Coolant (green) or equivalentwith the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilledwater. The use of other types of coolantsolutions or coolant colors, such as or-ange, may damage the engine coolingsystem.

Outside temperaturedown to

GenuineNISSANLong Life

Antifreeze/Coolant orequivalent

Demineral-ized or dis-tilled water

°C °F

-35 -30 50% 50%

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANTLEVELCheck the coolant level in the reservoir whenthe engine is cold. If the coolant level is belowthe MIN level, add coolant to the MAX level. If thereservoir is empty, check the coolant level in theradiator when the engine is cold. If there isinsufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiatorwith coolant up to the filler opening and also addit to the reservoir up to the MAX level.

If the cooling system frequently requirescoolant, have it checked by a NISSANdealer.

WDI0532

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM



CHANGING ENGINE COOLANTA NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.The service procedure can be found in theNISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reducedheater performance and engine overheat-ing.

WARNING

● To avoid the danger of being scalded,never change the coolant when the en-gine is hot.

● Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. Serious burns could becaused by high pressure fluid escapingfrom the radiator.

● Avoid direct skin contact with usedcoolant. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.Check your local regulations.

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply

the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10minutes for the oil to drain back intothe oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-insert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oillevel. It should be between the H (High) andL (Low) marks sB . This is the normal oper-ating oil level range. If the oil level is belowthe L (Low) mark sA , remove the oil filler capand pour recommended oil through theopening. Do not overfill sC .

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oilmaintenance intervals or during thebreak-in period, depending on the severityof operating conditions.

LDI0329 WDI0214

ENGINE OIL



CAUTION

Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-erating the engine with an insufficientamount of oil can damage the engine, andsuch damage is not covered by warranty.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reachesoperating temperature, then turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap sA by turning itcounterclockwise.

4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plugsB .

5. Remove the drain plug sB with a wrench byturning it counterclockwise and completelydrain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove andreplace it at this time. See “Changing engineoil filter” later in this section.

WARNING

● Prolonged and repeated contact withused engine oil may cause skin cancer.

● Try to avoid direct skin contact withused oil. If skin contact is made, washthoroughly with soap or hand cleaneras soon as possible.

● Keep used engine oil out of reach ofchildren.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

● Waste oil must be disposed of prop-erly.

● Check your local regulations.

6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a newwasher. Securely tighten the drain plug witha wrench. Do not use excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)

WDI0493



7. Refill engine with recommended oil throughthe oil filler opening, then install the oil fillercap securely.

See “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section of this manual fordrain and refill capacity.

The drain and refill capacity depends on theoil temperature and drain time. Use thesespecifications for reference only. Always usethe dipstick to determine when the properamount of oil is in the engine.

8. Start the engine. Check for leakage aroundthe drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-quired.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and applythe parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter sA .

4. Loosen the oil filter sA with an oil filterwrench by turning it counterclockwise. Thenremove the oil filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The engineoil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface witha clean rag.

Be sure to remove any old gasket materialremaining on the sealing surface of the en-gine.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with cleanengine oil.

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistanceis felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakagearound the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil ifnecessary.

WDI0495



WARNING

● Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT FluidNS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.

● Using transmission fluid other thanGenuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 willdamage the CVT, which is not coveredby the NISSAN new vehicle limitedwarranty.

When checking or replacement is required, werecommend your NISSAN dealer for servicing.

The specified CVT fluid is also described oncaution labels located in the engine compart-ment.

The fluid level should be checked using the HOTMAX range on the power steering fluid reservoirat fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on thepower steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).

If the fluid is below the MIN line, add GenuineNISSAN PSF. Remove the cap and fill throughthe opening.

CAUTION

● DO NOT OVERFILL.● Recommended fluid is Genuine

NISSAN PSF or equivalent.

For further brake fluid specification information,refer to “Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and consumerinformation” section of this manual.

WARNING

Use only new fluid from a sealed con-tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated fluidmay damage the brake system. The use ofimproper fluids can damage the brakesystem and affect the vehicle’s stoppingability.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid isspilled, immediately wash the surfacewith water.

WDI0256

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLETRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID

POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE FLUID



BRAKE FLUIDCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If thefluid level is below the MIN line or the brakewarning light comes on, add Genuine NISSANSuper Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT3 fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be addedfrequently, the system should be checked by aNISSAN dealer.

WINDOW WASHER FLUIDRESERVOIR

Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically.Add window washer fluid when the low windowwasher fluid warning light comes on (if soequipped).

To fill the window washer fluid reservoir, lift thecap off the reservoir tank and pour the windowwasher fluid into the tank opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for bettercleaning. In the winter season, add a windshieldwasher antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-structions for the mixture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when drivingconditions require an increased amount of win-dow washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-freeze or equivalent.

CAUTION

● Do not substitute engine anti-freezecoolant for window washer solution.This may result in damage to the paint.

● Do not fill the window washer reservoirtank with washer fluid concentrates atfull strength. Some methyl alcoholbased washer fluid concentrates maypermanently stain the grille if spilledwhile filling the window washer reser-voir tank.

● Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates withwater to the manufacturer’s recom-mended levels before pouring the fluidinto the window washer reservoir tank.Do not use the window washer reservoirtank to mix the washer fluid concen-trate and water.

LDI0079 WDI0533

WINDOW WASHER FLUID



● Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Anycorrosion should be washed off with a solu-tion of baking soda and water.

● Make certain the terminal connections areclean and securely tightened.

● If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days orlonger, disconnect the negative (-) batteryterminal cable to prevent discharge.

WARNING

● Do not expose the battery to flames orelectrical sparks. Hydrogen gas gener-ated by the battery is explosive. Do notallow battery fluid to contact your skin,eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Aftertouching a battery or battery cap, do nottouch or rub your eyes. Thoroughlywash your hands. If the acid contactsyour eyes, skin or clothing, immediatelyflush with water for at least 15 minutesand seek medical attention.

● Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid inthe battery is low. Low battery fluid cancause a higher load on the batterywhich can generate heat, reduce bat-tery life, and in some cases lead to anexplosion.

● When working on or near a battery, al-ways wear suitable eye protection andremove all jewelry.

● Battery posts, terminals and related ac-cessories contain lead and lead com-pounds. Wash hands after handling.

● Keep battery out of the reach ofchildren.

1. Remove the battery caps with a screwdriveras shown. Use a cloth to protect the batterycase.

WDI0224

BATTERY



2. Check the fluid level in each cell If it isnecessary to add fluid, add only distilledwater to bring the level up to the bottom ofthe filler opening. Do not overfill.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or undersevere conditions require frequent checks of thebattery fluid level.

JUMP STARTINGIf jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”in the “In case of emergency” section of thismanual. If the engine does not start by jumpstarting, the battery may have to be replaced.Contact a NISSAN dealer.

1. Power steering fluid pump2. Crankshaft3. Generator4. Air conditioner

WARNING

Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF orLOCK position. The engine could rotateunexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt(s) for signs of un-usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If thebelt is in poor condition or is loose, have itreplaced or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.

LDI0302

WDI0226

DRIVE BELTS



2. Have the belts checked regularly for condi-tion and tension in accordance with themaintenance schedule found in the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Platinum-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace platinum-tippedspark plugs as frequently as conventional typespark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSANService and Maintenance Guide”. Do not serviceplatinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.

● Always replace spark plugs with rec-ommended or equivalent ones.

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch areoff and that the parking brake is engagedsecurely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-move the spark plugs. An incorrect socketcan damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, see your NISSANdealer for assistance.

WDI0005

SPARK PLUGS



The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned andreused. Replace it according to the maintenancelog shown in the “NISSAN Service and Mainte-nance Guide.” When replacing the filter, wipe theinside of the air cleaner filter housing and thecover with a damp cloth.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

s1 Loosen the screw.

s2 Disconnect the electrical connector.

s3 Unlatch the clips and remove the air cleanercover. Remove the air cleaner filter.

WARNING

● Operating the engine with the aircleaner removed can cause you or oth-ers to be burned. The air cleaner notonly cleans the air, it stops the flame ifthe engine backfires. If it isn’t there, andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with the air cleanerremoved, and be careful when workingon the engine with the air cleanerremoved.

● Never pour fuel into the throttle body orattempt to start the engine with the aircleaner removed. Doing so could resultin serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTERThe in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-borne dust and pollen particles and reducessome objectionable outside odors. The filter islocated behind the glove box. Refer to the“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” forchange intervals.

To replace the filter, perform the following proce-dure:

1. Remove the 2 lower glove box hinge pins.Remove the glove box from the opening andlet it hang by the cord.

LDI0336 LDI0323

AIR CLEANER



2. Remove the filter cover from the intake unitby disengaging the 2 hook tabs at the bot-tom of the cover.

NOTE:

The filter is marked “UP”with an arrow. Theend of the filter with the arrow should facethe rear of the vehicle.

3. Slide the filter into the housing.

LDI0324 LDI0325



NOTE:

Make sure the filter sits on top of the 2supporting tabs on the housing.

4. Replace the cover by inserting the uppertabs inside the housing slot and pushing thehook tabs until they snap on to the housinglip.

5. Install the glove box door.

6. Fill out the date information on the smallreplacement label and attach it to the glovebox lid.

LDI0157



CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer or if a wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax or other material may be onthe blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a washersolution or a mild detergent. Your windshield isclean if beads do not form when rinsing with clearwater.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soakedin a washer solution or a mild detergent. Thenrinse the blades with clear water. If your wind-shield is still not clear after cleaning the bladesand using the wiper, replace the blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-age the windshield and impair drivervision.

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

s1 Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.

s2 Push the release tab, then move the wiperblade down the wiper arm to remove.

s3 Remove the wiper blade.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiperarm until it clicks into place.

CAUTION

● After wiper blade replacement, returnthe wiper arm to its original position;otherwise it may be damaged when thehood is opened.

● Make sure the wiper blades contact theglass; otherwise the arms may be dam-aged from wind pressure.

WDI0194

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES



Be careful not to let anything get into the washernozzle sA . This may cause clogging or improperwindshield washer operation. If something getsinto the nozzle, remove it with a needle or smallpin sB .

If the brakes do not operate properly, have thebrakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.

SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjustingbrakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjustevery time the brake pedal is applied.

WARNING

See a NISSAN dealer for a brake systemcheck if the brake pedal height does notreturn to normal.

BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audiblewear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is inmotion. The noise will be heard whether or not thebrake pedal is depressed. Have the brakeschecked as soon as possible if the wear indicatorsound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise maybe heard. Occasional brake noise during light tomoderate stops is normal and does not affect thefunction or performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals shouldbe followed. For more information regardingbrake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

WDI0337

BRAKES



Two types of fuses are used. Type A is used in thefuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type B isused in the passenger compartment fuse box.

Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. Theyare stored in the passenger compartment fusebox.

Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-partment and passenger compartment fuseboxes.

If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,the type A fuse will not be level with the fusepocket as shown in the illustration. This will notaffect the performance of the fuse. Make sure thefuse is installed in the fuse box securely.

Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in theunderhood fuse boxes.

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come on,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

LDI0455 LDI0457 LDI0327

FUSES



3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing thetab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. Thefuse puller is located in the center of the fuseblock in the passenger compartment.

5. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a newfuse sB .

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

Fusible linksIf the electrical equipment does not operate andfuses are in good condition, check the fusiblelinks. If any of these fusible links are melted,replace with only genuine NISSAN parts.

WDI0452



PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

CAUTION

Never use a fuse of a higher or loweramperage rating than specified on thefuse box cover. This could damage theelectrical system or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not operate,check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlightswitch are OFF.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

4. If the fuse is open sA , replace it with a knowngood fuse sB .

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electricalsystem checked and repaired by a NISSANdealer.

LDI0328Type A

WDI0452



INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERYReplace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-lows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-gent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver sA into the slit sBof the corner and twist it to separate theupper part from the lower part.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2025 or equiva-lent.

● Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-tric terminals as doing so could cause amalfunction.

● Hold the battery by the edges. Holdingthe battery across the contact points willseriously deplete the storage capacity.

● Make sure that the + side faces the bot-tom of the case.

Type BLDI0456

SDI1867

BATTERY REPLACEMENT



4. Close the lid securely as illustrated sC sD .

5. Operate the buttons to check its operation.

See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance forreplacement.

FCC Notice:Changes or modifications not expressly ap-proved by the party responsible for compli-ance could void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of IndustryCanada.

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may not causeharmful interference, and (2) this devicemust accept any interference received, in-cluding interference that may cause undes-ired operation of the device.

HEADLIGHTSReplacing the xenon headlight bulb

WARNING

cHIGH VOLTAGE

When xenon headlights are on, they pro-duce a high voltage. To prevent an electricshock, never attempt to modify or disas-semble. Always have your xenon head-lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. Foradditional information, see “Headlightand turn signal switch” in the “Instru-ments and controls” section.

Replacing the halogen headlight bulbThe headlight is a semi-sealed beam type whichuses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-cause the headlight assembly must be removedfrom the vehicle for bulb replacement, see yourNISSAN dealer.

WDI0535

LIGHTS



CAUTION

● Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment isnecessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.

● Do not leave the headlight assemblyopen without a bulb installed for a longperiod of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,etc. entering the headlight body mayaffect bulb performance. Remove thebulb from the headlight assembly justbefore a replacement bulb is installed.

● Only touch the plastic base when han-dling the bulb. Never touch the glassenvelope. Touching the glass could sig-nificantly affect bulb life and/or head-light performance.

● High pressure halogen gas is sealedinside the halogen bulb. The bulb maybreak if the glass envelope is scratchedor the bulb is dropped.

● Use the same number and wattage asoriginally installed:

Low beam:Wattage: 55Bulb no.: 9012*

High beam:Wattage: 55Bulb no.: 9012*

*: Always check with the Parts Depart-ment at a NISSAN dealer for the latestparts information.



EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly

High/low (Halogen) 55 9012

High/low (Xenon) (special) D2S

Day time running lamp 27 3156K

Park/Turn 27/8 4157NAK

Cornering 27 3156K

Front fog light 55 H11

Front personal/map lights 3.4 —

Console box illumination 3.8 194

Glove box light 3.4 158

Vanity mirror light 2.1 —

Step light 3.8 194

Rear personal lamps 8 —

Rear console box light 5 W5W

High-mounted stop light (Type A) 5 W5W

High-mounted stop light (Type B) — LED

Trunk light 3.4 158

Rear combination light

Tail/Stop/Turn 27/5 3057K

Backup (reversing) 13 912

Sidemarker 5 W5W

License plate light 5 168

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.



1. Headlamp assembly2. Map light3. Rear personal lights4. Fog light5. Step light6. High-mounted stop light (Type A)7. Trunk light8. High-mounted stop light (Type B)9. License plate light10. Rear combination light

WDI0534



Replacement proceduresAll other lights are either type A, B, C or D. Whenreplacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lampand/or cover.

Indicates bulb removalIndicates bulb installation

Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.

WDI0263Front personal/map lights – Type A

LDI0338

Front personal/map lights – Type BLDI0339



Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing. Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.

Use a cloth s1 to protect the housing.

Vanity mirror lightWDI0340

Step lightLDI0341

Rear personal lightWDI0342



Squeeze the tabs on the connector. Pull out thebulb.

Rear console box light (if so equipped)LDI0397

High-mounted stop light (if so equipped)WDI0344

Trunk lightWDI0343



If you have a flat tire, see the “In case ofemergency” section of this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System(TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with the TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS). Itmonitors tire pressure of all tires exceptthe spare. When the low tire pressurewarning light is lit or flashing continuously,one or more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated. If equipped, the systemalso displays pressure of all tires (exceptthe spare tire) on the display screen bysending a signal from a sensor that isinstalled in each wheel.

The TPMS will activate only when thevehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (forexample a flat tire while driving).

For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-sure warning light” in the “Instruments andcontrols” section, “Tire pressure informa-tion” in the “Display screen, heater, air

conditioner and audio and phone sys-tems” section, “Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driv-ing” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In caseof emergency” section.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including thespare) often and always prior to long dis-tance trips. The recommended tire pres-sure specifications are shown on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label or the Tireand Loading Information label under the9Cold Tire Pressure9 heading. The Tireand Loading Information label is affixed tothe driver side center pillar. Tire pressuresshould be checked regularly because:

● Most tires naturally lose air over time.

● Tires can lose air suddenly whendriven over potholes or other objectsor if the vehicle strikes a curb whileparking.

The tire pressures should be checkedwhen the tires are cold. The tires areconsidered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours, or drivenless than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderatespeeds.

If the tires are used at speeds above 100mph (162 km/h) where it is legal to do so(on a race track for example), the cold tireinflation pressure must be increased. Re-fer to 9Checking tire pressure9 later in thissection.

Set the tire pressure to the normal coldtire inflation pressure when the vehiclespeed or load is reduced.

Incorrect tire pressure, including un-der inflation, may adversely affecttire life and vehicle handling.

WHEELS AND TIRES



WARNING

● Improperly inflated tires can failsuddenly and cause an accident.

● The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR) is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label. Thevehicle weight capacity is indi-cated on the Tire and LoadingInformation label (if soequipped). Do not load your ve-hicle beyond this capacity. Over-loading your vehicle may result inreduced tire life, unsafe operat-ing conditions due to prematuretire failure, or unfavorable han-dling characteristics and couldalso lead to a serious accident.Loading beyond the specified ca-pacity may also result in failure ofother vehicle components.

● Before taking a long trip, orwhenever you heavily load yourvehicle, use a tire pressure gaugeto ensure that the tire pressuresare at the specified level.

● Do not drive your vehicle over 85MPH (137 km/h) unless it isequipped with high speed ratedtires. Driving faster than 85 MPH(137 km/h) may result in tire fail-ure, loss of control and possibleinjury.

● Increase the cold tire inflationpressure as indicated in (Check-ing tire pressure( later in this sec-tion when using the tires speci-fied by NISSAN above 100 MPH(162 km/h) where it is legal to doso (on a race track for example).Failure to increase the cold tireinflation pressure may result intire failure, loss of control andpossible injury. After such use,readjust tire pressure.

● For additional information re-garding tires, refer to “ImportantTire Safety Information” (US) or“Tire Safety Information”(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-mation Booklet.



Tire and loading information label

s1 Seating capacity: The maximum num-ber of occupants that can be seatedin the vehicle.

s2 Vehicle load limit: See loading infor-mation in the “Technical and con-sumer information” section.

s3 Original tire size: The size of the tiresoriginally installed on the vehicle atthe factory.

s4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires tothis pressure when the tires are cold.Tires are considered COLD after thevehicle has been parked for 3 or morehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km) at moderate speeds. The recom-mended cold tire inflation is set by themanufacturer to provide the best bal-ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,driveability, tire noise, etc., up to thevehicle’s GVWR.

s5 Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” laterin this section.

s6 Spare tire size (if so equipped).

WDI0509



Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from thetire.

2. Press the pressure gauge squarelyonto the valve stem. Do not press toohard or force the valve stem side-ways, or air will escape. If the hissingsound of air escaping from the tire isheard while checking the pressure,reposition the gauge to eliminate thisleakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the gaugestem and compare to the specifica-tion shown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If toomuch air is added, press the core ofthe valve stem briefly with the tip ofthe gauge stem to release pressure.Recheck the pressure and add orrelease air as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other tires,including the spare.

LDI0393



Size Cold Tire InflationPressure

High Speed/Maximum LoadCold Tire InflationPressure

Front Original TireP225/55R17 95V 230 kPa, 33 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSIP245/45R18 96V 220 kPa, 32 PSI 260 kPa, 38 PSI

Rear Original TireP225/55R17 95V 230 kPa, 33 PSI 240 kPa, 35 PSIP245/45R18 96V 220 kPa, 32 PSI 260 kPa, 38 PSI

Spare Tire T145/80*17 420 kPa, 60 PSI N/A

*: “R” or “D” depending on tire manufacturer

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufacturers toplace standardized information on thesidewall of all tires. This information iden-tifies and describes the fundamentalcharacteristics of the tire and also pro-vides the tire identification number (TIN)for safety standard certification. The TINcan be used to identify the tire in case of arecall.

ExampleWDI0394



s1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)

1. P: The 9P9 indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles (not alltires have this information).

2. Three-digit number (215): This num-ber gives the width in millimeters ofthe tire from sidewall edge to side-wall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This number,known as the aspect ratio, gives thetire’s ratio of height to width.

4. R: The 9R9 stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15): This numberis the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95): Thisnumber is the tire’s load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support. You may notfind this information on all tires be-cause it is not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should notdrive the vehicle faster than the tirespeed rating.

ExampleWDI0395



s2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) for anew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the 9Depart-ment Of Transportation.9 The symbolcan be placed above, below or to theleft or right of Tire Identification Num-ber.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’sidentification mark

3. Two-digit code: Tire size

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code(Optional)

5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-ture

6. Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. For ex-ample, the numbers 3103 means the31st week of 2003. If these numbersare missing, then look on the othersidewall of the tire.

s3 Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-ers also must indicate the materials in thetire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and others.

s4 Maximum permissible inflation pres-sure

This number is the greatest amount of airpressure that should be put in the tire. Donot exceed the maximum permissible in-flation pressure.

s5 Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum loadin kilograms and pounds that can be car-ried by the tire. When replacing the tireson the vehicle, always use a tire that hasthe same load rating as the factory in-stalled tire.

s6 Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires an in-ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).

s7 The word “radial”

ExampleWDI0396



The word “radial” is shown if the tire hasradial structure.

s8 Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that aredefined throughout this section, IntendedOutboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall thatcontains a whitewall, bears white letteringor bears manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on theother sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-ward facing sidewall of an asymmetricaltire that has a particular side that mustalways face outward when mounted on avehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

● When changing or replacing tires, besure all four tires are of the same type(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) andconstruction. A NISSAN dealer may beable to help you with information abouttire type, size, speed rating andavailability.

● Replacement tires may have a lowerspeed rating than the factory equippedtires, and may not match the potentialmaximum vehicle speed. Never exceedthe maximum speed rating of the tire.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-els to provide good performance all year, includ-ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Seasontires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&Son the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than All Season tires and may be moreappropriate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some modelsto provide superior performance on dry roads.Summer tire performance is substantially re-duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not havethe tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icyconditions, NISSAN recommends the use ofSNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all fourwheels.

Snow tiresIf snow tires are needed, it is necessary to selecttires equivalent in size and load rating to the origi-nal equipment tires. If you do not, it can adverselyaffect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratingsthan factory equipped tires and may not matchthe potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the samesize, brand, construction and tread pattern on allfour wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, studded tiresmay be used. However, some U.S. states andCanadian provinces prohibit their use. Checklocal, state and provincial laws before installingstudded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of



studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may bepoorer than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Tire chains/cables cannot be installed onP245/45R18 size tires. Installation of thetire chains/cables on P245/45R18 sizetires will cause damage to the vehicle. Ifyou plan to use tire chains/cables, youshould install P225/55R17 size tires onyour vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited according tolocation. Check the local laws before installingtire chains. When installing tire chains, make surethey are the proper size for the tires on yourvehicle and are installed according to the chainmanufacturer’s suggestions. Use only SAEclass “S” chains. Class “S” chains are used onvehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance.Vehicles that can use Class “S” chains are de-signed to meet the minimum clearances betweenthe tire and the closest vehicle suspension orbody component required to accommodate theuse of a winter traction device (tire chains orcables). The minimum clearances are determinedusing the factory equipped tires. Other types maydamage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners whenrecommended by the tire chain manufacturer to

ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chainmust be secured or removed to prevent the pos-sibility of whipping action damage to the fendersor underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading yourvehicle when using tire chains. In addition, driveat a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle maybe damaged and/or vehicle handling and perfor-mance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on thefront wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving withchains in such conditions can cause damage tothe various mechanisms of the vehicle due tosome overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the tiresevery 7,500 miles (12,000 km).

See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-gency” section of this manual for tire re-placing procedures.

As soon as possible, tighten thewheel nuts to the specified torquewith a torque wrench.

WDI0258



Wheel nut tightening torque:80 ft-lb (108 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-ened to specifications at all times. Itis recommended that wheel nuts betightened to specification at eachtire rotation interval.

WARNING

● After rotating the tires, check andadjust the tire pressure.

● Retighten the wheel nuts whenthe vehicle has been driven for600 miles (1,000 km) (also incases of a flat tire, etc.).

● Do not include the spare tire inthe tire rotation.


1. Wear indicator2. Location mark

Tire wear and damage

WARNING

● Tires should be periodically in-spected for wear, cracking, bulg-ing or objects caught in the tread.If excessive wear, cracks, bulgingor deep cuts are found, the tire(s)should be replaced.

● The original tires have built-intread wear indicators. When thewear indicators are visible, thetire(s) should be replaced.

● Tires degrade with age and use.Have tires, including the spare,over 6 years old checked by aqualified technician becausesome tire damage may not be ob-vious. Replace the tires as neces-sary to prevent tire failure andpossible personal injury.

● Improper service of the spare tiremay result in serious personal in-jury. If it is necessary to repair thespare tire, contact a NISSANdealer.


WDI0259



Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size, treaddesign, speed rating and load carrying capacityas originally equipped. Recommended types andsizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the“Technical and consumer information” section ofthis manual.

WARNING

● The use of tires other than those recom-mended or the mixed use of tires ofdifferent brands, construction (bias,bias-belted or radial), or tread patternscan adversely affect the ride, braking,handling, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance,speedometer calibration, headlight aimand bumper height. Some of these ef-fects may lead to accidents and couldresult in serious personal injury.

● If the wheels are changed for any rea-son, always replace with wheels whichhave the same off-set dimension.Wheels of a different off-set couldcause premature tire wear, degrade ve-hicle handling characteristics and/orinterference with the brakediscs/drums. Such interference canlead to decreased braking efficiencyand/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-cal and consumer information” sectionof this manual for wheel off-setdimensions.



● Do not install a deformed wheel or tireeven if it has been repaired. Suchwheels or tires could have structuraldamage and could fail without warning.

● The use of retread tires is notrecommended.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-tion Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handlingand tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can getout of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-anced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-formed with the wheels off the vehicle.Spin balancing the wheels on the vehiclecould lead to mechanical damage.

● For additional information regardingtires, refer to “Important Tire SafetyInformation” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-formation Booklet .

Care of wheels

● Wash the wheels when washing the vehicleto maintain their appearance.



● Clean the inner side of the wheels when thewheel is changed or the underside of thevehicle is washed.

● Do not use abrasive cleaners when washingthe wheels.

● Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents orcorrosion. Such damage may cause loss ofpressure or poor seal at the tire bead.

● NISSAN recommends waxing the roadwheels to protect against road salt in areaswhere it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire) (if so equipped)

Observe the following precautions if the TEM-PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orinvolved in an accident:

WARNING

● The spare tire should be used for emer-gency use only. It should be replacedwith the standard tire at the first oppor-tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-tial damage.

● Drive carefully while the TEMPORARYUSE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoidsharp turns and abrupt braking whiledriving.

● Periodically check spare tire inflationpressure. Always keep the pressure ofthe TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tireat 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).

● With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY sparetire installed do not drive the vehicle atspeeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● When driving on roads covered withsnow or ice, the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire should be used on therear wheels and the original tire usedon the front wheels (drive wheels). Usetire chains only on the front (original)tires.

● Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USEONLY spare tire will wear at a faster ratethan the standard tire. Replace thespare tire as soon as the tread wearindicators appear.

● Do not use the spare tire on othervehicles.

● Do not use more than one spare tire atthe same time.

● Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

● Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chainswill not fit properly and may cause dam-age to the vehicle.

● Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLYspare tire is smaller than the originaltire, ground clearance is reduced. Toavoid damage to the vehicle, do notdrive over obstacles. Also, do not drivethe vehicle through an automatic carwash since it may get caught.




MEMO

9 Technical and consumer information

Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . 9-2Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Recommended SAE viscosity number . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Air conditioner system refrigerant and oilrecommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

When traveling or registering your vehicle inanother country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9

Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Vehicle identification number(chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Tire and loading information label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11

Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Installing front license plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12

Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16Maximum load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Towing load/specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19Towing safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19Flat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23

Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Emission control system warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . 9-25Event data recorders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . . 9-26

In the event of a collision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26


The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the proceduredescribed in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

US measure Imp measure Liter

Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 Unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (RON 91)*1

Engine oil *7Drain and Refill

With oil filter change 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.2 • API Certification Mark *2 *3•API grade SL or SM, Energy Conserving *2 *3• ILSAC grade GF-3 and GF-4*2 *3Without oil filter change 4-1/4 qt 3-1/2 qt 4.0

Cooling systemWith reservoir 2-1/4 gal 1-7/8 gal 8.5 50% Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent

50% Demineralized or distilled water

CVT fluid See a NISSAN dealer for service. Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2*4

Power steering fluid (PSF) Refill to the proper level according to the instructions inthe “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.

Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*8

Brake fluid Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*5 or equivalent DOT 3

Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a)*6

Air conditioning system oil — — — NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent*6

Windshield washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze orequivalent

*1: For further details, see “Fuel recommendation.”*2: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation.”*3: For further details, see “Recommended SAE viscosity number.”*4: Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered bythe NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.*5: Available in mainland USA through your NISSAN dealer.*6: For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations.”*7: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.*8: For Canada, NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF), DEXRON™ III/MERCON™, or equivalent ATF may also be used.

CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDEDFUEL/LUBRICANTS

9-2 Technical and consumer information


FUEL RECOMMENDATION

NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre-mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc-tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasoline isnot available you may use unleaded regular gaso-line with an octane rating of at least 87 AKInumber (Research octane number 91), but youmay notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meetsthe World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-

cations where it is available. Many of the automo-bile manufacturers developed this specificationto improve emission control system and vehicleperformance. Ask your service station manager ifthe gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially de-signed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN sup-ports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests thatyou use reformulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanolwith or without advertising their presence.NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels ofwhich the oxygenate content and the fuel com-patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-termined. If in doubt, ask your service stationmanager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please takethe following precautions as the usage of suchfuels may cause vehicle performance problemsand/or fuel system damage.

● The fuel should be unleaded and havean octane rating no lower than thatrecommended for unleaded gasoline.

● If an oxygenate-blend other thanmethanol blend is used, it should con-tain no more than 10% oxygenate.(MTBE may, however, be added up to15%.)

● If a methanol blend is used, it shouldcontain no more than 5% methanol(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). Itshould also contain a suitable amountof appropriate cosolvents and corro-sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-lated with appropriate cosolvents andcorrosion inhibitors, such methanolblends may cause fuel system damageand/or vehicle performance problems.At this time, sufficient data is not avail-able to ensure that all methanol blendsare suitable for use in NISSAN ve-hicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine stall-ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced afterusing oxygenate-blend fuels, immediatelychange to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with alow blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates cancause paint damage.

Technical and consumer information 9-3


E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuelethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 canonly be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Donot use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. governmentregulations require fuel ethanol dispensingpumps to be identified by a small, square, orangeand black label with the common abbreviation orthe appropriate percentage for that region.

Aftermarket fuel additivesNISSAN does not recommend the use of anyaftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve depositremovers, etc.) which are sold commercially.Many of these additives intended for gum, varnishor deposit removal may contain active solvents orsimilar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuelsystem and engine.

Octane rating tipsUsing unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than recommended can causepersistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Sparkknock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-vere, this can lead to engine damage. If youdetect a persistent heavy spark knock evenwhen using gasoline of the stated octanerating, or if you hear steady spark knockwhile holding a steady speed on level

roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct thecondition. Failure to correct the conditionis misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSANis not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in sparkknock, after-run and/or overheating, which maycause excessive fuel consumption or enginedamage. If any of the above symptoms are en-countered, have your vehicle checked at aNISSAN dealer.

However, now and then you may noticelight spark knock for a short time whileaccelerating or driving up hills. This is not acause for concern, because you get thegreatest fuel benefit when there is lightspark knock for a short time under heavyengine load.

CAUTION

● Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehiclenot specifically designed for E-85 fuelcan damage fuel system componentsand is not covered by the NISSAN newvehicle limited warranty.

● E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%fuel ethanol and 15% unleadedgasoline.

● U.S. government regulations requireethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-fied by a small, square, orange andblack label with the common abbrevia-tion or the appropriate percentage forthat region.



ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTERRECOMMENDATION

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade, qualityand viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactoryengine life and performance. See 9Capacitiesand recommended fuel/lubricants9 earlier in thissection. NISSAN recommends the use of anenergy conserving oil in order to improve fueleconomy.

Select only engine oils that meet the AmericanPetroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval

Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-tion mark on the front of the container. Oils whichdo not have the specified quality label should notbe used as they could cause engine damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oiladditives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-sary when the proper oil type is used and main-tenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or has beenpreviously used should not be used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness changeswith temperature. Because of this, it is importantto select the engine oil viscosity based on thetemperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-ated before the next oil change. The chart “Rec-ommended SAE viscosity number” shows therecommended oil viscosities for the expectedambient temperatures. Choosing an oil viscosityother than that recommended could cause seri-ous engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filterYour new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with ahigh-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or itsequivalent for the reason described in “Changeintervals”.

Change intervalsThe oil and oil filter change intervals for yourengine are based on the use of the specifiedquality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filtersthat are not of the specified quality, or exceedingrecommended oil and filter change intervalscould reduce engine life. Damage to the enginecaused by improper maintenance or use of incor-rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-ranty.

WTI0082



Your engine was filled with a high-quality engineoil when it was built. You do not have to changethe oil before the first recommended changeinterval. Oil and filter change intervals dependupon how you use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions mayrequire more frequent oil and filter changes:

● repeated short distance driving at cold out-side temperatures

● driving in dusty conditions

● extensive idling

● towing a trailer

● stop and go commuting

Refer to the 9NISSAN Service and MaintenanceGuide9 for the maintenance schedule.

RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITYNUMBER

● SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for alltemperatures. SAE 10W-30 or SAE10W-40 viscosity oils may be used if theambient temperature is above 0°F (-18°C).

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMREFRIGERANT AND OILRECOMMENDATIONSThe air conditioner system in your NISSANvehicle must be charged with the refriger-ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and the oil, NISSANA/C system oil Type S or the exact equiva-lents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil willcause severe damage to the air condition-ing system and will require the replace-ment of all air conditioner systemcomponents.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in yourNISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozonelayer. Although this refrigerant does not affect theearth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-tions require the recovery and recycling of anyrefrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trainedtechnicians and equipment needed to recoverand recycle your air conditioner system refriger-ant.

Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your airconditioner system.

ATI1028



ENGINE

Model VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm3) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.CVT (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed)

CO % at idle

Spark plug DILFR5A11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain

The spark ignition system of this vehicle meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.

SPECIFICATIONS



WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheels

17 x 7JJ

18 x 7.5JJ

Tires

P225/55R17 95V

P245/45R18 96V

Spare tire

Temporary T145/80*17

Full size 17” or 18”

Speed rating 17” H

18” V

*: “R” or “D” depending on tire manufacturer

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 193.5(4,915)

Overall width in (mm) 71.7(1,821)

Overall height in (mm) 58.3(1,480)

Front tread

17 inch tire in (mm) 61.4(1,560)

18 inch tire in (mm) 61.0(1,549)

Rear tread

17 inch tire in (mm) 61.6(1,565)

18 inch tire in (mm) 61.2(1,554)

Wheelbase in (mm) 111.2(2,824)

Gross vehicle weightrating

lb (kg) See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label”on the center pillar be-tween the driver’s sidefront and rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lb (kg)

Rear lb (kg)



When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-hicle in another country, you should first findout if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-cle’s engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too lowmay cause engine damage. All gasoline vehiclesmust be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas whereappropriate fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of yourvehicle to another country, state, provinceor district, it may be necessary to modify thevehicle to meet local laws and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-sion control and safety standards vary accordingto the country, state, province or district; there-fore, vehicle specifications may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-other country, state, province or districtand registered, its modifications, transpor-tation, and registration are the responsibil-ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsiblefor any inconvenience that may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN) PLATEThe vehicle identification number (VIN) plate isattached as shown. This number is the identifica-tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicleregistration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(chassis number)The vehicle identification number is located asshown.

WTI0171 LTI0070

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERINGYOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHERCOUNTRY

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION



ENGINE SERIAL NUMBERThe number is stamped on the engine as shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.CERTIFICATION LABELThe Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-able vehicle information, such as: Gross VehicleWeight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Reviewit carefully.

EMISSION CONTROLINFORMATION LABELThe emission control information label is at-tached to the underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0049 WTI0172 WTI0173



TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATIONLABELThe cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. The label is located asshown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATIONLABELThe air conditioner specification label is affixed tothe underside of the hood as shown.

WTI0174 WTI0167

WTI0177

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE



Use the following steps to mount the front licenseplate:

Before mounting the license plate, confirm thatthe following parts are enclosed in the plasticbag:

● License plate bracket

● License plate bracket screws x 2

● License plate screws x 2

● Screw grommets x 2

1. Make a shallow hole in the bumper fascia atthe location marks (small dimples) using a0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging thearea behind the fascia, apply only light pres-sure to the drill.

2. Insert the grommets into the holes in thebumper fascia.

3. Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver intothe grommet hole to turn the threaded part ofthe grommet 90°.

4. Mount the license plate bracket using thetwo longer screws.

5. Use the two shorter hex head screws tomount the license plate to the license platebracket.

WARNING

● It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area inside a vehicle. Ina collision, people riding in theseareas are more likely to be seri-ously injured or killed.

● Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is notequipped with seats and seatbelts.

● Be sure everyone in your vehicleis in a seat and using a seat beltproperly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself withthe following terms before loading yourvehicle:

● Curb Weight (actual weight of yourvehicle) - vehicle weight including:standard and optional equipment, flu-ids, emergency tools, and spare tireassembly. This weight does not in-clude passengers and cargo.

● GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curbweight plus the combined weight ofpassengers and cargo.

● GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) - maximum total combinedweight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch, trailertongue load and any other optionalequipment. This information is lo-cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.label.

● GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -maximum weight (load) limit specifiedfor the front or rear axle. This informa-tion is located on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. label.

● GCWR (Gross Combined Weightrating) - The maximum total weightrating of the vehicle, passengers,cargo, and trailer.

VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION



● Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,Total load capacity - maximum totalweight limit specified of the load(passengers and cargo) for the ve-hicle. This is the maximum combinedweight of occupants and cargo thatcan be loaded into the vehicle. If thevehicle is used to tow a trailer, thetrailer tongue weight must be in-cluded as part of the cargo load. Thisinformation is located on the Tire andLoading Information label (if soequipped).

● Cargo capacity - permissible weightof cargo, the subtracted weight ofoccupants from the load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-hicle shown as 9The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo9 on the Tire andLoading Information label. Do not exceedthe number of occupants shown as9Seating Capacity9 on Tire and LoadingInformation label.

To get 9the combined weight of occu-pants and cargo9, add the weight of alloccupants, then add the total luggageweight. Examples are shown in the follow-ing illustration.



Steps for determining correct loadlimit

1. Locate the statement “The combinedweight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXXlbs” on your vehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if theXXX amount equals 1400 lbs. andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =300 kg.)

ExampleLTI0152



5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargo andluggage load capacity calculated inStep 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirmthat you do not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.See “Measurement of Weights” later inthis section.

Also check tires for proper inflation pres-sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-tion label.

LOADING TIPS

● The GVW must not exceed GVWRor GAWR as specified on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel.

● Do not load the front and rear axle tothe GAWR. Doing so will exceed theGVWR.

WARNING

● Properly secure all cargo withropes or straps to help prevent itfrom sliding or shifting. Do notplace cargo higher than the seat-backs. In a sudden stop or colli-sion, unsecured cargo couldcause personal injury.

● Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or themaximum front and rear GAWRs.If you do, parts of your vehiclecan break, tire damage could oc-cur, or it can change the way yourvehicle handles. This could resultin loss of control and cause per-sonal injury.

● Overloading not only can shortenthe life of your vehicle and thetire, but can also cause unsafevehicle handling and longer brak-ing distances. This may cause apremature tire failure whichcould result in a serious accidentand personal injury. Failurescaused by overloading are notcovered by the vehicle’swarranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent weightshifts that could affect the balance of yourvehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, driveto a scale and weigh the front and the rearwheels separately to determine axleloads. Individual axle loads should not ex-ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loadsshould not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR). These ratings aregiven on the vehicle certification label. Ifweight ratings are exceeded, move or re-move items to bring all weights below theratings.



WARNING

Overloading or improper loading of atrailer and its cargo can adversely affectvehicle handling, braking and perfor-mance and may lead to accidents.

CAUTION

● Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy loadfor the first 500 miles (800 km). Yourengine, axle or other parts could bedamaged.

● For the first 500 miles (800 km) that youtow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and do not make starts at fullthrottle. This helps the engine and otherparts of your vehicle wear in at theheavier loads.

Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-marily to carry passengers and cargo. Rememberthat towing a trailer places additional loads onyour vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-ing and other systems.

A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is availableon the website at www.nissanusa.com. Thisguide includes information on trailer towing ca-pability and the special equipment required forproper towing.

MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITSMaximum trailer loadsNever allow the total trailer load to exceed thevalue specified in the “TowingLoad/Specification” chart found later in this sec-tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weightplus its cargo weight.

● When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brakesystem must be used.

The GCWR equals the combined weight of thetowing vehicle (including passengers and cargo)plus the total trailer load. Towing loads greaterthan these or using improper towing equipmentcould adversely affect vehicle handling, brakingand performance.

The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is notonly related to the maximum trailer loads, but alsothe places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-priate for level highway driving may have to bereduced for low traction situations (for example,on slippery boat ramps).

LTI0164

TOWING A TRAILER



Temperature conditions also can affect towing.For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outsidetemperatures on graded roads can affect engineperformance and cause overheating. The trans-mission high fluid temperature protection mode,which helps reduce the chance of transmissiondamage, could activate and automatically de-crease engine power. Under some conditions,engine and vehicle speed could be reduced. Planyour trip carefully to account for trailer and vehicleload, weather, and road conditions.

WARNING

Overheating can result in reduced enginepower and lower vehicle speed. Also,when the high temperature mode oper-ates, engine and vehicle speed may begradually reduced. On highways, the re-duced speed may be lower than other traf-fic which could increase the chance of acollision. Be especially careful when driv-ing. If necessary, pull to the side of theroad at a safe place and allow the engineto cool or the transmission to return tonormal operation.

CAUTION

Vehicle damage resulting from impropertowing procedures is not covered byNISSAN warranties.

Tongue loadKeep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent ofthe total trailer load within the maximum tongueload limits shown in the following “TowingLoad/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow forproper tongue load.

WTI0160



Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight(GAW)

The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certificationlabel. The GVW equals the combined weight ofthe unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optionalequipment. In addition, front or rear GAW mustnot exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.certification label.

Towing capacities are calculated assuming abase vehicle with driver and any options requiredto achieve the rating. Additional passengers,cargo and/or optional equipment, such as thetrailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle andreduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacityand trailer tongue load.

The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed toconfirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, FrontGAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined WeightRating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.

All vehicle and trailer weights can be measuredusing platform type scales commonly found attruck stops, highway weigh stations, buildingsupply centers or salvage yards.

To determine the available payload capacity fortongue load, use the following procedure.

1. Locate the GVWR on theF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.

2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all ofthe passengers and cargo that are normallyin the vehicle when towing a trailer.

3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from theGVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-able maximum tongue load.

To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weighyour trailer on a scale with all equipment andcargo, that are normally in the trailer when it istowed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is notmore than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shownon the trailer and is not more than the calculatedavailable maximum towing capacity.

Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale tomake sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and RearGross Axle Weight are not more than FrontGross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weighton the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need tobe moved or removed to meet the specified rat-ings.

Example:

● Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighedon a scale - including passengers, cargo andhitch - 4,304 lb. (1952 kg).

● Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) fromF.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -4,546 lb. (2062 kg).

● Maximum Towing Load from “TowingLoad/Specification9 chart - 1,000 lb. (454kg).

TI1012M



4,546 lb. (2062 kg) GVWR

– 4,304 lb. (1952 kg) GVW

= 242 lb. (109 kg) Available for tongueweight

1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available fortowing

242 lb. (109 kg) Available tongue weight

/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity

= 24 % tongue weight

In this case, more tongue weight capacity isavailable than is needed to pull the maximumweight trailer. Remember to keep trailer tongueweight between 10 – 15 % of the trailer weight. Ifthe tongue load becomes excessive, rearrangecargo to allow for proper tongue load. Alwaysverify that available capacities are under the re-quired ratings.

TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION

TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION

UNIT: lb (kg)

MAXIMUM TOWINGLOAD

1,000 (454)

MAXIMUM TONGUELOAD

100 (45)

TOWING SAFETY

Trailer hitch

Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.A genuine NISSAN trailer hitch is available fromyour NISSAN dealer (Canada only). Make surethe trailer hitch is securely attached to the ve-hicle, to help avoid personal injury or propertydamage due to sway caused by crosswinds,rough road surfaces or passing trucks.

Hitch ballChoose a hitch ball of the proper size and weightrating for your trailer:

● The required hitch ball size is stamped onmost trailer couplers. Most hitch balls alsohave the size printed on the top of the ball.

● Choose the proper class hitch ball based onthe trailer weight.

● The diameter of the threaded shank of thehitch ball must be matched to the ball mounthole diameter. The hitch ball shank shouldbe no more than 1/16” smaller than the holein the ball mount.

● The threaded shank of the hitch ball must belong enough to be properly secured to theball mount. There should be at least 2threads showing beyond the lock washerand nut.

Ball mount

The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount andthe ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.Choose a proper class ball mount based on thetrailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount shouldbe chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with theground.

Class I hitchClass I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ballmount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailersof a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).

You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment to thevehicle that has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximumweight rating, but your vehicle is only capable oftowing the maximum trailer weights shown in theTowing Load/Specification Chart earlier in thissection.



CAUTION

● Do not use axle-mounted hitches.● The hitch should not be attached to or

affect the operation of the impact-absorbing bumper.

● Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-tem, brake system, etc. to install atrailer hitch.

● To reduce the possibility of additionaldamage if your vehicle is struck fromthe rear, where practical, remove thehitch and/or receiver when not in use.

● After the hitch is removed, seal the boltholes to prevent exhaust fumes, wateror dust from entering the passengercompartment.

● Regularly check that all trailer hitchmounting bolts are securely mounted.

Tire pressures● When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-

hicle tires to the recommended coldtire pressure indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

● Trailer tire condition, size, load ratingand proper inflation pressure shouldbe in accordance with the trailer andtire manufacturer’s specifications.

Safety chains

Always use suitable safety chains between yourvehicle and the trailer. The safety chains shouldbe crossed and should be attached to the hitch,not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leaveenough slack in the chains to permit turningcorners.

Trailer lights

CAUTION

When splicing into the vehicle electricalsystem, a commercially available power-type module/converter must be used toprovide power for all trailer lighting. Thisunit uses the vehicle battery as a directpower source for all trailer lights whileusing the vehicle tail light, stoplight andturn signal circuits as a signal source. Themodule/converter must draw no morethat 15 milliamps from the stop and taillamp circuits. Using a module/converterthat exceeds these power requirementsmay damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-tain the proper equipment and to have itinstalled.

Trailer lights should comply with federal and/orlocal regulations. For assistance in hooking uptrailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-table trailer dealer.

Trailer brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed.

WARNING

Never connect a trailer brake system di-rectly to the vehicle brake system.

Pre-towing tips

● Be certain your vehicle maintains a levelposition when a loaded and/or unloadedtrailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if ithas an abnormal nose-up or nose-downcondition; check for improper tongue load,overload, worn suspension or other possiblecauses of either condition.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Keep the cargo load as low as possible inthe trailer to keep the trailer center of gravitylow.



● Load the trailer so approximately 60% of thetrailer load is in the front half and 40% is inthe back half. Also make sure the load isbalanced side to side.

● Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, andtrailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach atrailer to the vehicle.

● Be certain your rearview mirrors conform toall federal, state or local regulations. If not,install any mirrors required for towing beforedriving the vehicle.

● Determine the overall height of the vehicleand trailer so the required clearance isknown.

Trailer towing tipsIn order to gain skill and an understanding of thevehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,stopping and backing up in an area which is freefrom traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-mance will be somewhat different than undernormal driving conditions.

● Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

● Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin orlock to prevent the coupler from inadvert-ently becoming unlatched.

● Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.

● Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.

● Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed.

● When backing up, hold the bottom of thesteering wheel with one hand. Move yourhand in the direction in which you want thetrailer to go. Make small corrections andback up slowly. If possible, have someoneguide you when you are backing up.

Always block the wheels on both vehicle andtrailer when parking. Parking on a slope is notrecommended; however, if you must do so:

CAUTION

If you move the shift selector lever to the P(Park) position before blocking thewheels and applying the parking brake,transmission damage could occur.

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Have someone place blocks on the down hillside of the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowlyrelease the brake pedal until the blocks ab-sorb the vehicle load.


5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).

6. Turn off the engine.

To drive away:

1. Start the vehicle.


3. Shift the transmission into gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer areclear from the blocks.


7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.

● When going down a hill, shift into a lowergear and use the engine braking effect.When going up a long grade, downshift thetransmission to a lower gear and reducespeed to reduce chances of engine over-loading and/or overheating.

● If the engine coolant rises to an extremelyhigh temperature when the air conditionersystem is on, turn off the air conditioner.Coolant heat can be additionally vented byopening the windows, switching the fancontrol to high and setting the temperaturecontrol to the HOT position.



● Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalcircumstances.

● Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first500 miles (805 km).

● For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you dotow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).

● Have your vehicle serviced more often thanat intervals specified in the recommendedMaintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-vice and Maintenance Guide”.

● When making a turn, your trailer wheels willbe closer to the inside of the turn than yourvehicle wheels. To compensate for this,make a larger than normal turning radiusduring the turn.

● Crosswinds and rough roads will adverselyaffect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-ing vehicle sway. When being passed bylarger vehicles, be prepared for possiblechanges in crosswinds that could affect ve-hicle handling.

Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal toallow the vehicle to coast and steer asstraight ahead as the road conditions allow.This combination will help stabilize the vehicle- Do not correct trailer sway by steering orapplying the brakes.

2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply thebrakes and pull to the side of the road in asafe area.

3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-anced as described earlier in this section.

● Be careful when passing other vehicles.Passing while towing a trailer requires con-siderably more distance than normal pass-ing. Remember, the length of the trailer mustalso pass the other vehicle before you cansafely change lanes.

● Down shift the transmission to a lower gearfor engine braking when driving down steepor long hills. This will help slow the vehiclewithout applying the brakes.

● To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not useoverdrive.

● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too longor too frequently. This could cause thebrakes to overheat, resulting in reducedbraking efficiency.

● Increase your following distance to allow forgreater stopping distances while towing atrailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually

● Do not use cruise control while towing atrailer.

● Some states or provinces have specificregulations and speed limits for vehicles thatare towing trailers. Obey the local speedlimits.

● Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.

● When stopped in traffic for long periods oftime in hot weather, put the vehicle in the P(Park) position.

● When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe orrear bumper.

● Make sure you disconnect the trailer lightsbefore backing the trailer into the water orthe trailer lights may burn out.

When towing a trailer, transmission fluidshould be changed more frequently. Foradditional information, see the “Mainte-nance and do-it-yourself” section earlier inthis manual.



FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on theground is sometimes called flat towing. Thismethod is sometimes used when towing a vehiclebehind a recreational vehicle, such as a motorhome.

CAUTION

● Failure to follow these guidelines canresult in severe transmission damage.

● Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-ways tow forward, never backward.

● DO NOT tow any automatic transmis-sion vehicle with all four wheels on theground (flat towing). Doing so WILLDAMAGE internal transmission partsdue to lack of transmission lubrication.

● For emergency towing procedures referto “Towing recommended by NISSAN”in the “In case of emergency” section ofthis manual.

Continuously VariableTransmissionTo tow a vehicle equipped with a continuouslyvariable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dollyMUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s drivewheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer’srecommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) QualityGrades: All passenger car tires must conform tofederal safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.

Quality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) timesas well on the government course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practices anddifferences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-sured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of thetire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-mance which all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory test wheel thanthe minimum required by law.

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING



WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is es-tablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-ther separately or in combination, cancause heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the followingemission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan North America, Inc.Consumer Affairs DepartmentP.O. Box 191Gardena, CA 90248-0191

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of these warranties may be found withother vehicle warranties in your Warranty Infor-mation Booklet which comes with your NISSANvehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Informa-tion Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a re-placement by writing to:

● Nissan Canada Inc.5290 Orbitor DriveMississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-tion to notifying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other informationabout motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contacting ourConsumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at1-800-NISSAN-1.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMWARRANTY

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (USonly)



Due to legal requirements in some states andCanadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test ofthe emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when itis driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,the ready condition can be obtained by ordinaryusage of the vehicle.

If a powertrain system component is repaired orthe battery is disconnected, the vehicle may bereset to a “not ready” condition. Before taking theI/M test, check the vehicle’sinspection/maintenance test readiness condi-tion. Turn the ignition switch ON without startingthe engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light(MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and thenblinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is9not ready9. If the MIL does not blink after 20seconds, the I/M test condition is 9ready.9 If theMIL indicates the vehicle is in a 9not ready9 con-dition, drive the vehicle through the followingpattern to set the vehicle to the ready condition. Ifyou cannot or do not want to perform the drivingpattern, a NISSAN dealer can conduct it for you.

WARNING

Always drive the vehicle in a safe andprudent manner according to traffic con-ditions and obey all traffic laws.

1. Start the engine when the engine coolanttemperature gauge needle points to C. Al-low the engine to idle until the gauge needlepoints between the C and H (normal oper-ating temperature).

2. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88km/h), then quickly release the acceleratorpedal completely and keep it released for atleast 10 seconds.

3. Quickly depress the accelerator pedal for amoment, then drive the vehicle at a speed of53 - 60 MPH (86 - 96 km/h) for at least 9minutes.

4. Stop the vehicle.

5. Accelerate the vehicle to 35 MPH (55 km/h)and maintain the speed for 20 seconds.

6. Repeat steps 4 through 5 at least 10 times.

7. Accelerate the vehicle to 55 MPH (88 km/h)and maintain the speed for at least 3 min-utes.

8. Stop the vehicle. Place the transmission se-lector lever in the P (Park) or N (Neutral)position.

9. Turn the engine off.

10. Repeat steps 1 - 8 at least one more time.

If steps 1 through 7 are interrupted, repeat thepreceding step. Any safe driving mode is accept-able between steps. Do not stop the engine untilstep 7 is completed.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST



Your vehicle is equipped with a variety of comput-ers that monitor and control a number of systemsto optimize performance and help service techni-cians with diagnosis and repair. Some of thecomputers monitor emission control systems,braking systems, engine systems, transmissionsystems, tire pressure systems, and airbag sys-tems. Some data about vehicle operation may bestored in the computers for use during servicing.Other data may be stored if a crash event occurs.For example, vehicle speed, brake application,steering angle, air bag readiness, air bag perfor-mance, and seat belt use by the driver or passen-ger may be recorded. These types of systems aresometimes called Event Data Recorders.

Special equipment can be used to access theelectronic data that may be stored in the vehicle’scomputers (sounds are not recorded). NISSANand NISSAN dealers have equipment to accesssome of this data; others may also have thisequipment. The data may be retrieved duringroutine vehicle servicing or for special research. Itmight also be accessed with the consent of thevehicle owner or lessee, in response to a requestby law enforcement, or as otherwise required orpermitted by law.

A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the bestsource of service and repair information for yourvehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrationsand step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-cedures, this manual is the same one used by thefactory-trained technicians working at NISSANdealerships. Also available are genuine NISSANOwner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Serviceand Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 modelyear and later contact:

Tweddle Litho Company1-800-450-9491www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 modelyear and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For current pricing and availability of genuineNISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model yearand prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:

Resolve Corporation20770 Westwood RoadStrongsville, OH 441361-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contactyour nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your areacall the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-tive will assist you.

Also available are genuine NISSAN Service andOwner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.

IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISIONUnfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikelyevent, there is some important information youshould know.

Many insurance companies routinely authorizethe use of non-genuine collision parts in order tocut costs, among other reasons.

EVENT DATA RECORDERS OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICEMANUAL ORDER INFORMATION



Insist on the use of genuine NISSANcollision parts!If you want your vehicle to be restored using partsmade to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-tions – if you want to help it to last and hold itsresale value, the solution is simple. Tell yourinsurance agent and your repair shop toonly use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damagecaused by a non-genuine part.

Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protectyour personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-tection and maintain the resale value of yourvehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, usingGenuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-necessary excess wear and tear expenses at theend of your lease.

NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones tominimize the risk that the hood will penetrate thewindshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-genuine (imitation) parts may not provide suchbuilt-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.

Why should you take a chance?In over 40 states, the law says you must beadvised if non-genuine parts are used to repairyour vehicle. And some states have enacted lawsthat restrict insurance companies from authoriz-ing the use of non-genuine collision parts duringthe new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-tect you, so you can take action to protect your-self.

It’s your right!If you should need further information visit us at:www.nissanusa.com.




MEMO

10 Index

A

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Air bag (See supplemental restraintsystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impactair bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-45

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-14Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Air conditioner

Air conditioner service . . . . . . . . . . .4-21Air conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11Air conditioner system refrigerant andoil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-6Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . .4-21

Alarm system(See vehicle security system) . . . . . . . . .2-17Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-11Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . . . .5-19Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7Audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22

AM-FM-SAT radio with compact disc(CD) changer. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29, 4-36AM-FM-SAT radio with compact disc(CD) player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-33, 4-39Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . .4-32

Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-42

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Automatic

Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-30Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-39Transmission selector lever lockrelease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12

AUX jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

B

Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13

Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8Belts (See drive belts) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14BluetoothT hands-free phone system . . . . .4-44Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-33Brake

Anti-lock braking system (ABS) . . . . . .5-19Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-27Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Brake wear indicators . . . . . . . .2-16, 8-20Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-13Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Break-in schedule. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Brightness controlInstrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

Brightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . . . .4-18Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . . . .2-10Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27

C

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-12CD care and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-41CD changer (See audio system) . . . .4-33, 4-39CD player (See audio system) . . . . . . . . .4-32Child restraint with top tether strap . . . . . .1-21Child restraints . . . . . . .1-12, 1-13, 1-18, 1-20

Precautions on child restraints . . .1-18, 1-26,1-33Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-22

Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . . . . . .7-2Clock

(models with navigation system) . . . . . .4-16(models without navigation system) . . . . .4-5

Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-16C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Compact disc (CD) player . . . . . . . . . . .4-32Compass display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6


Console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . .5-9

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9

Control panel buttonsBrightness/contrast button. . . . . . . . .4-18Back button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-11Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-7With navigation system . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Without navigation system. . . . . . . . . .4-2

ControlsAudio controls (steering wheel) . . . . . .4-42

CoolantCapacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

D

Daytime running light system(Canada only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-24

Defroster switchRear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . . . . .2-25Display controls(see control panel buttons). . . . . . . . .4-2, 4-6Distance to empty. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-8Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Door open warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Drive belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14Drive positioner, Automatic. . . . . . . . . . .3-30Driving

Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

E

Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Emission control information label . . . . . . .9-10Emission control system warranty . . . . . . .9-24Engine

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-8Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . . .8-8Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine coolant level. . . . . . . .8-7Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine compartment check locations. . . .8-7Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5

Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-11Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Engine specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

English/metric setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15Enter button. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-6Event data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . .5-2Eyeglass case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33

F

Flashers(See hazard warning flasher switch). . . . . .2-27Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5Fluid

Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12

F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . . .9-10Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Front air bag system(See supplemental restraint system) . . . . .1-45

10-2


Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Fuel

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3Fuel-filler door and cap . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-22

Fuel economy setting . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-8Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22

G

Garage door opener, HomeLinkT UniversalTransceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46Gas cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37

H

Hands-free phone system, BluetoothT . . . .4-44

Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . .2-27Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-8

Active head restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-9Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . . . .2-22Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Heater

Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . . . .2-46Hood release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-27

I

Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . .2-18, 3-3, 5-7Important vehicle information label. . . . . . .9-10In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Indicator lights and audible reminders(See warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Instrument brightness control . . . . . . . . .2-25Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . . . . .2-25Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7

Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3Remote keyless entry operation . . . . . .3-13Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18

Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Interior trunk lid release. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22

ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20

J

Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7

K

Keyfob battery replacement . . . . . . . . . .8-24Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system (SeeIntelligent Key system) . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Keys, For Intelligent Key system . . . . . . . . .3-2

L

LabelsAir conditioner specification label . . . . .9-11C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Emission control information label . . . . .9-10Engine serial number . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10F.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . .9-10Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-52

Language setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-15LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20License plate

Installing the license plate . . . . . . . . .9-11Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-14Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . . .8-27Bulb check/instrument panel. . . . . . . .2-10

10-3


Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-22Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-22Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43Light bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-13Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-47Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

LockChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4Fuel-filler door lock opener lever. . . . . .3-22Glove box lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-35Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . .3-21

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . .2-12Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . .2-13Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-12

M

MaintenanceChanging the maintenance interval . . . . .4-9Displaying the maintenance noticereminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-9General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3

Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Outside the vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-2Resetting the maintenance interval . . . . .4-9Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . . . .8-4

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . .1-2Map pocket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-3

Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-25Mirror

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

N

NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18, 3-3, 5-7

O

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating) . . . . .9-4Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Oil

Capacities and recommendedfuel/lubricants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . .8-10Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . .9-5Engine oil viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5

Outside mirror control . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28Overheat

If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Owner’s manual order form . . . . . . . . . .9-26Owner’s manual/service manual orderinformation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

P

ParkingParking brake operation . . . . . . . . . .5-13Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-44Phone, BluetoothT hands-free system . . . .4-44Power

Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-31Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

PrecautionsMaintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . .8-5Precautions on childrestraints. . . . . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-26, 1-33Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-10Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2

Programmable features . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-11Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9

10-4


R

RadioCar phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . .4-43Compact Disc (CD) changer . . . .4-33, 4-39Steering wheel audio control switch. . . .4-42

Readiness for inspection maintenance(I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6Rear sonar system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . . . .2-30Rear sun shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-42Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Recorders

Event data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . . . .9-6Registering your vehicle in another country. . .9-9Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . . . .9-24Resetting average speed . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Resetting the fuel economy . . . . . . . .4-4, 4-8Resetting trip 1 and trip 2 . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Resetting trip time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4

S

SafetyChild safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6Child seat belts . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-26, 1-33Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .9-24

Seat adjustmentFront manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Front power seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-4

Seat beltChild safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-12Infants and small children . . . . . . . . .1-13Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . .1-10Pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-14Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .1-17Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-16Three-point type with retractor. . . . . . .1-14

Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Seatback pockets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Seats

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Automatic drive positioner . . . . . . . . .3-30Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2Heated seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-28Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-2Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-6

Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizersystem), engine start. . . . . . . . .2-18, 3-3, 5-7Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20Service manual order form . . . . . . . . . . .9-26Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21Setting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5, 4-11Shift lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission(CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .1-16Sonar

Rear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4

SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-52Starting

Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . .5-8Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-7Precautions when starting and driving . . .5-2Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8

Startup screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7Steering

Heated steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Power steering fluid. . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Power steering system . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . .4-42Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Sunglasses case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Sunglasses holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-33Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-53, 2-14Supplemental front impact air bag system . .1-45Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels. . . . . . .1-52Precautions on supplemental restraintsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-37

Supplemental restraint system(Supplemental air bag system). . . . . . . . .1-37Switch

Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23Automatic power window switch . . . . .2-39Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-26Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-27Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-22Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . .2-22Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-6Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . .3-5

10-5


Rear sonar system off switch . . . . . . .2-30Rear window and outside mirror defrosterswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21Traction control system (TCS) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) offswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-30Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20

T

Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . .2-5Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18, 3-3, 5-7Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2Tire

Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2Spare tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 8-43Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Tire placard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-40Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-39Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . .9-23Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8

Tire pressureLow tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12

Tire pressure display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . .5-3Tire rotation maintenance reminder . . . . . .4-10Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . . . .1-21

TowingFlat towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23Tow truck towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10Towing load/specification . . . . . . . . .9-19Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16

Traction control system (TCS) off switch . . .2-29Transceiver

HomeLinkT Universal Transceiver . . . . .2-46Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11Driving with Continuously VariableTransmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-9Selector lever lock release . . . . . . . . .5-12

Travel (See registering your vehicle in anothercountry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Trip button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3, 4-7Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4Trip time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-4Trunk access through the rear seat . . . . . . .1-6Trunk lid lock opener lever . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Trunk light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-25

U

Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . .9-23

V

Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . . . .9-8Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch. . .2-30Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . . . .5-21

Vehicle electronic system . . . . . . . . . . .4-13Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN)(Chassis number). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9Vehicle loading information. . . . . . . . . . .9-12Vehicle recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicleimmobilizer system), engine start . .2-18, 3-3, 5-7Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

W

WarningAir bag warning light . . . . . . . . .1-53, 2-14Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Battery charge warning light . . . . . . . .2-11Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . .2-11Engine oil pressure warning light . . . . .2-11Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . .2-27Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . .2-12Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . .2-13Passenger air bag and status light. . . . .1-47Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13Vehicle security system. . . . . . . . . . .2-17Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-52Warning/indicator lights and audiblereminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10

Warning lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Washer switch

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20Weights (See dimensions and weights) . . . .9-8

10-6


Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8When traveling or registering your vehiclein another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-9Window washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-12Windows

Locking passengers’ windows . . . . . . .2-39Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-38Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . .2-39

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . .2-20Wiper

Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-20Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19

10-7


RECOMMENDED FUEL:NISSAN recommends the use of unleaded pre-mium gasoline with an octane rating of at least 91AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research oc-tane number 96). If unleaded premium gasolineis not available you may use unleaded regulargasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKInumber (Research octane number 91), but youmay notice a decrease in performance.

CAUTION

● Using a fuel other than that specifiedcould adversely affect the emissioncontrol system, and may also affect thewarranty coverage.

● Under no circumstances should aleaded gasoline be used, because thiswill damage the three-way catalyst.

● Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.Your vehicle is not designed to run onE-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damagethe fuel system components and is notcovered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-ited warranty.

For additional information, see “Capacities andrecommended fuel/lubricants in the “Technicaland consumer information” section.

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:● API Certification Mark

● API grade SL or SM, Energy Conserving

● ILSAC grade GF-3 and GF-4

● 5W-30 Viscosity preferred

See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendation” inthe “Technical and consumer information” sec-tion of this manual.

TIRE COLD PRESSURE:See tire placard.

RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLEBREAK-IN PROCEDURE:During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicleuse, follow the recommendations outlined in the“BREAK-IN SCHEDULE” information found inthe “Starting and driving” section of this manual.Follow these recommendations for the future re-liability and economy of your new vehicle. Failureto follow these recommendations may result invehicle damage or shortened engine life.

GAS STATION INFORMATION


1. Engine coolant 8-7

2. Window washer fluid 8-12

3. Engine oil 8-8

4. Passenger supplemental front impact air bag1-37

5. Audio system 4-22; Air conditioner 4-19

6. Supplemental side-impact air bag 1-37

7. Front seats 1-2

8. Spare tire 6-2

9. Fuel-filler door release 3-22; Fuel recom-mendation 9-3

10. Keys 3-2

11. Seat belts 1-10

12. Trunk release 3-20

13. Supplemental curtain side-impact air bag1-37

14. Driver supplemental front impact air bag1-37

15. Hood release 3-20

16. Meters and gauges 2-3

WGS0030

QUICK REFERENCE


2007 Nissan Maxima

Documents

Transcript of 2007 Nissan Maxima